​

Eat Your Beets

  • About
  • Spring Recipes
  • Vegetables
  • Side Dishes
  • Recipe Index
menu icon
go to homepage
  • About
  • Spring Recipes
  • Vegetables
  • Side Dishes
  • Recipe Index
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
  • subscribe
    search icon
    Homepage link
    • About
    • Spring Recipes
    • Vegetables
    • Side Dishes
    • Recipe Index
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Sign Up To Our Newsletter →
    Home » Recipe index

    How To Make Celery Juice

    August 24, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Celery juice in a cup.

    Wondering How To Make Celery Juice? Here's the easiest recipe for you. This fresh celery juice recipe is a no-fuss recipe you just can't go wrong. Enjoy fresh celery juice any time of the day with this fuss free recipe.

    celery juice
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why This Recipe Works

    • Ridiculously Easy: This celery juice recipe is as simple as it gets—just blend, strain, and sip. No fancy ingredients, no complicated steps.
    • Crisp & Refreshing: With its naturally light and hydrating taste, this juice is the perfect way to start your day or cool off in the afternoon.
    • Minimal Effort, Maximum Freshness: It takes just a few minutes to make and gives you that fresh, clean flavor only homemade juice can deliver.

    🥘 Ingredients

    celery.

    To make the fresh juice, all you'll need is 1 bunch of celery, around 8-9 stalks (preferably organic).

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Citrus Zing: Squeeze in some lemon, lime, or even orange juice for a fresh, tangy boost—because plain celery can be a lil' meh on its own.
    • Sweeten It Up: If celery juice tastes too green for you, throw in a green apple, pear, or even a handful of pineapple for a naturally sweet twist.
    • Spice It Up: Add a pinch of cayenne or fresh ginger for a metabolism-boosting, tingly little kick. Bonus: ginger makes it feel like a fancy wellness shot.
    • Herby Freshness: Blend in a few fresh mint leaves or basil for a spa-like, refreshing vibe. Because why not make your morning drink feel boujee?
    • Cucumber Cool: Toss in some cucumber for extra hydration and a mellow flavor that smooths out the celery’s boldness.

    🔪 How to Make Celery Juice

    Once you have everything ready, here's what you'll need to do to make the juice.

    how to make celery juice.

    Step One: Wash your celery with lukewarm water, cut of the base of the stalks. Chop them according to your preferences. Depends on your juicer you might want to chop them in smaller or longer chunks.

    celery juice

    Step Two: Run blended celery chunks through the juicer. Strain the juice through a sieve. Drink immediately or up to 30 minutes for best health benefits. Store the leftovers in the fringe for up to 12 hours.

    celery juice

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    Here are my top tips for juicing celery the right way:

    • Thorough Cleaning and Preparation: Start by washing your celery well to remove any dirt. Chop it into smaller pieces to help your juicer or blender break down the fibers more effectively.
    • Strain for a Clean Finish: Straining the blended juice is key. It removes the extra pulp and ensures a light, clean drink that’s easier on the stomach and maximizes the juice’s natural benefits. If you don't have a fine mesh strainer, you can use a clean nut milk bag or a muslin cloth to strain the juice and separate all the harder, solid chunks from the liquid.
    • Drink Straight Away: Enjoy your celery juice fresh, as its nutrients are at their peak right after extraction. If you need to store it, use an airtight glass container and keep it refrigerated to preserve its quality as much as possible.
    celery juice

    💭 FAQs

    Do I Need To Use A Juicer Or Can I Use A Blender To Make Celery juice?

    Juicer: Using a juicer extracts the juice from the celery, leaving behind the pulp. This results in a smooth and liquid consistency without any fiber. Juicers are specifically designed to separate the juice from the pulp efficiently.

    Blender: If you use a blender, you'll need to add some water to help blend the celery. Once blended, you'll need to strain the mixture through a fine mesh sieve or nut milk bag to separate the juice from the pulp. This method retains more fiber in the juice, resulting in a thicker consistency compared to juicing.

    Both methods have their advantages and drawbacks, so choose the one that best fits your preferences and equipment availability.

    🧂Serving Suggestions

    • Morning Detox: Enjoy a glass of fresh celery juice first thing in the morning to kickstart your day and support digestion. Pair it with a light breakfast like oatmeal or a smoothie for a healthy start.
    • Refreshing Afternoon Boost: Serve your celery juice chilled with a few ice cubes for a refreshing midday pick-me-up. It’s perfect alongside a light snack like fruit or nuts to keep you energized.
    • Post-Workout Hydration: After a workout, hydrate with fresh celery juice to replenish electrolytes. Pair it with a protein-rich snack like a hard-boiled egg or a handful of almonds for recovery.
    • Detox Cleanse: Serve celery juice as part of a detox routine, complementing a salad or vegetable-based meal to enhance the body’s natural cleansing process.
    celery juice

    🍽 Related Recipes

    • einkorn angel hair and cherry tomato pasta in a white bowl.
      One-Pan Einkorn Angel Hair Pasta with Cherry Tomatoes
    • Salmon Dill Puree.
      Lemon Dill Salmon Mousse (Bariatric Friendly)
    • close-up-watermelon-slices-with-blackberry-plastic-disposable-cup-perfect for a summer party.
      How To Host An Awesome Summer Party
    • Oven baked lobster tail with garlic butter and lemon.
      How To Cook Lobster Tail At Home

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Celery juice in a cup.

    How To Make Celery Juice

    Angela Milnes
    Packed with nutrients and a clean, fresh flavor, this juice is perfect for starting your day or enjoying as a revitalizing snack.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 Servings
    Calories 6 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 8-9 Stalks Celery around 8-9 stalks is one bunch

    Instructions
     

    • Wash your celery with lukewarm water, cut of the base of the stalks.
    • Chop them according to your preferences. Depends on your juicer you might want to chop them in smaller or longer chunks. Run blended celery chunks through the juicer. Strain the juice through a sieve.
    • Drink immediately or up to 30 minutes for best health benefits. Store the leftovers in the fringe for up to 12 hours.

    Notes

    While making celery juice is pretty much a straightforward process, you might want to take note of these little tips and tricks too.
    If you don't have a fine mesh strainer, you can use a clean nut milk bag or a muslin cloth to strain the juice and separate all the harder, solid chunks from the liquid.
    Make sure you choose fresh organic celery for this easy celery juice recipe. It will really make a difference with how the flavors turn out.
    After juicing celery, add a few ice cubes into it right before you serve it.
    You can use a juicer or a high-speed blender to make the juice.
    If you want to add some sweetness to the juice, you can add some honey or a bit of natural sweetener like brown rice syrup or agave.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 6kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 0.3gFat: 0.1gSaturated Fat: 0.02gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.03gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.01gSodium: 32mgPotassium: 104mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 180IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 16mgIron: 0.1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Recipes to Try

    If you enjoyed this healthy juice recipe and are inspired to try more healthy recipes, here are a few good ones you might want to check out.

    • Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw?
    • Strawberry Mojito Mocktail
    • Avocado Salad
    • Vegetable Train
    celery juice

    Vegan Brownie In A Mug

    August 24, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Vegan brownie in a mug.

    This Vegan Brownie In A Mug is the perfect way to beat those midnight chocolate cravings and satisfy your sweet tooth quickly. The soft, fudgy brownie is nice and handy in a mug, and topped with some semi-melted chocolate chips for that extra chocolate flavor.

    vegan brownie in a mug
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Comforting: I'm not so much about mug cakes and mug recipes but this microwave brownie in a mug has my heart!
    • Tasty: This mug brownie is the perfect simple and classic chocolate brownie, that will satisfy any chocolate craving in minutes.
    • Vegan: Plus, it is vegan, which means you can also make these when you're hosting a little movie night or a sleepover at your home.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    You'll need just a few simple ingredients to make this vegan brownie in a mug.

    Vegan Brownie Ingredients
    • All Purpose Flour: Serves as the main structure for the brownie, giving it shape and form.
    • Cane Sugar: Sweetens the brownie, enhancing its overall taste.
    • Cocoa Powder: Provides the intense chocolate flavor that defines a brownie.
    • Vegan Mini Chocolate Chips: Add extra pockets of melty chocolate goodness.
    • Soy Milk: Acts as a vegan liquid, contributing to the batter's consistency.
    • Vegetable Oil: Ensures the brownie stays moist and rich in texture.
    • Vanilla Extract: Adds a subtle depth of flavor, complementing the chocolate.
    • Baking Powder: Helps the brownie rise, creating a fluffy texture.
    • Salt: Balances the sweetness and enhances the chocolate flavor.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖 Brownie Variations

    You can try lots of different variations to the brownie mug cake recipe.

    • You can also make a dark chocolate version of this brownie in a mug recipe by using dark chocolate chips instead of the regular ones.
    • Instead of the vegan chocolate chips, you can use peanut butter chips or some caramel chips into the mix.
    • Another great idea is to add some chopped walnuts into the brownie mixture.

    🔪 How To Make Brownie In A Mug

    Once you have your ingredients ready, here's what you'll need to do to make the fudgy mug brownie.

    vegan brownie in a mug
    1. Step 1: In an 8 to 12 oz mug, add the dry ingredients- all-purpose flour, cocoa powder, baking powder, salt, and sugar. Mix until well combined. Then add the wet ingredients, milk, oil, and vanilla extract.
    vegan brownie in a mug
    1. Step 2: Mix until well combined. Add the chocolate chips on top. Put in the microwave for 1 minute and 45 seconds, or add a few more seconds, if it still has lots of wetness. Let it cool off for at least one minute. Garnish with a little confectioners' sugar, optional.
    vegan brownie in a mug

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • To add some extra flavor to the microwave mug brownie, you can use brown sugar instead of cane sugar.
    • To get the perfect fudgy brownie, remember not to overcook it. If you let the brownie mug cake microwave for too long, it'll turn into a tough brownie.
    • Make sure you use a good quality, heavy ceramic mug to make the single serving brownie.
    • To get the perfect gooey brownie in a mug, remember to use a fresh leavening agent and the best quality cocoa powder you can get your hands on.
    vegan brownie in a mug

    💭 FAQs

    What size mug should I use for a vegan mug brownie?

    It's recommended to use a standard 8-ounce or 10-ounce microwave-safe mug. This size allows the brownie to cook evenly without overflowing.

    Can I use whole wheat flour instead of all-purpose flour?

    Yes, you can substitute whole wheat flour for all-purpose flour. However, be aware that whole wheat flour may result in a denser texture.

    How do I make the brownie gluten-free?

    To make a gluten-free vegan mug brownie, use a gluten-free all-purpose flour blend in place of regular flour. Ensure that all other ingredients, such as baking powder and chocolate chips, are also gluten-free.

    Can I bake the mug brownie in the oven instead of microwaving it?

    Yes, you can bake the brownie in the oven. Preheat your oven to 350°F (180°C), prepare the batter in an oven-safe ramekin, and bake for 8-12 minutes, or until set.

    Best Way to Store Vegan Brownie

    The best way to store a vegan brownie in a mug is to first cover it with plastic wrap or a small plate if you're planning to eat it within a day or two. Store it at room temperature to keep it fresh. For longer storage, place the mug brownie in an airtight container and refrigerate it, where it will stay fresh for up to 3 days. If you need to store it for an even longer period, you can freeze the brownie. Just make sure it’s sealed tightly to prevent freezer burn, and it will stay good for up to 3 months.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    • You can enjoy the vegan brownie mug cake on its own when you're hit by a brownie craving.
    • If you want to go the extra mile, you can team it up with some vanilla ice cream topped on it, or even just some whipped cream.
    • I also like to drizzle the brownie mug cake with a bit of Instant Pot Caramel Sauce or some extra chocolate sauce if I'm feeling fancy.
    vegan brownie in a mug

    🍽 More Dessert Recipes

    • The Best No Bake Banana Pudding.
      The Best No Bake Banana Pudding
    • Peach Pie Bars.
      Homemade Peach Pie Bars – Sweet, Simple, and So Good!
    • Cherry Cobbler Gluten Free.
      Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler Recipe
    • Tropical Papaya Berry Bircher With Chia Seeds.
      Tropical Papaya Berry Bircher With Chia Seeds

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Vegan brownie in a mug.

    Vegan Brownie In A Mug

    Angela Milnes
    Satisfy your sweet tooth in minutes with this Vegan Brownie in a Mug! Rich, fudgy, and entirely plant-based, this quick treat is made in the microwave for instant chocolatey goodness.
    4.20 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 minute min
    0 minutes mins
    Total Time 6 minutes mins
    Course Desserts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 Serving
    Calories 193 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoon All-purpose flour Good quality all purpose flour is a crucial part of the brownie batter.
    • 1 tablespoon Cocoa Powder
    • 1 tablespoon Vegetable oil
    • ½ teaspoon Vanilla extract
    • ½ teaspoon Baking Powder
    • 1 pinch Salt

    Instructions
     

    • Once you have your ingredients ready, here's what you'll need to do to make the fudgy mug brownie.
    • In a 8 to 12 oz mug, add the dry ingredients- all-purpose flour, cocoa powder, baking powder, salt and sugar. Mix until well combined.
    • Then add the wet ingredients, milk, oil, vanilla extract. Mix until well combined. Add the chocolate chips on top.
    • Put in the microwave for 1 minute and 45 seconds, or add a few more seconds, if it still has lots of wetness. 
    • Let it cool off for at least one minute. Garnish with a little confectioners sugar, optional.

    Notes

    Ready to give this single-serving dessert recipe a try? Here are some more tips and tricks to take note of.
    To add some extra flavor to the microwave mug brownie, you can use brown sugar instead of cane sugar.
    To get the perfect fudgy brownie, remember not to overcook it. If you let the brownie mug cake microwave for too long, it'll turn into a tough brownie.
    Make sure you use a good quality, heavy ceramic mug to make the single-serving brownie.
    To get the perfect gooey brownie in a mug, remember to use a fresh leavening agent and the best quality cocoa powder you can get your hands on. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 193kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 3gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 8gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.1gSodium: 252mgPotassium: 95mgFiber: 2gSugar: 0.4gCalcium: 126mgIron: 2mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Try These Super Simple Recipes

    If you enjoyed making this easy mug brownie recipe and are inspired to try some more such easy recipes, here are a few good ones you might want to check out.

    • Best Summer Fruit Tart
    • Raw Vegan Bread
    • Air Fryer Yellow Squash
    • Honeycakes
    • Santa Belt Christmas Brownies
    • Christmas Tree Brownies

    Instant Pot Chicken Noodle Soup

    August 22, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Chicken noodle soup in a bowl.

    This easy Instant Pot Chicken Noodle Soup recipe is a great recipe to try your hands at when you're looking for an easy meal that the entire family can enjoy, or are just craving for some comfort food.

    Instant pot chicken noodle soup.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Simple: My favorite part about this chicken noodle soup is its simplicity. Pressure cooking is one of my favorite cooking methods because it really cuts down the cooking time so much.
    • Healthy: Plus, Instant Pot cooking uses high pressure, which helps preserve the nutrients in food.

    If you love this recipe then you'll want to try this delicious Smoked Sausage Soup or Instant Pot Kielbasa And Cabbage recipe.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Chicken noodle soup ingredients.

    You'll need just a handful of simple ingredients to make the best chicken noodle soup.

    • Chicken Leg: Forms the protein base of the soup, lending a rich flavor.
    • Garlic: Adds depth and a pungent kick to the broth.
    • Dried Thyme: Infuses the soup with a herbaceous note.
    • Seasonings: Salt and pepper balance and enhance the other flavors.
    • Liquid Smoke: Introduces a subtle smoky undertone.
    • Yellow Onion: Contributes a savory sweetness to the broth.
    • Carrots: Adds texture and a touch of sweetness while boosting the nutritional profile.
    • Home-style Egg Noodles: Provide a hearty, comforting element to the soup.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Noodle Swap: Ditch the egg noodles for cheese tortellini (because why not add a lil' surprise in every bite?) or go gluten-free with chickpea or rice noodles for a hearty twist.
    • Creamy Dreamy: Stir in a splash of coconut milk or heavy cream at the end for a luxuriously silky broth—kinda like a chicken pot pie in soup form.
    • Spice It Up: Feeling bold? Add a pinch of smoked paprika, turmeric, or a swirl of sriracha to give your soup a lil’ kick. Your taste buds will thank you.
    • Veggie-Packed Power: Bulk up your soup with chopped kale, zucchini, or sweet potatoes for extra color and flavor (because veggies deserve to be the star sometimes, too).
    • Lemon Love: Brighten up the broth with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice at the end—trust me, it takes this soup from cozy to chef’s kiss levels of delicious.

    🔪 How To Make Instant Pot Chicken Noodle Soup

    Water, chicken, spices, and liquid smoke in the Instant Pot.
    1. Step 1: Add water, chicken, spices, and liquid smoke to the Instant Pot. Seal the lid and pressure valve. Cook on high for 15 minutes.
    Cooked chicken in the Instant Pot.
    1. Step 2: Quick-release pressure when done. Remove and shred the chicken. Set the cooked chicken aside. Dice the onions to the desired size, and peel and slice the carrots. 
    Cooked shredded chicken and chopped veggies in broth.
    1. Step 3: Add egg noodles, meat, and vegetables back to the instant pot. Seal the lid and pressure valve. Let the noodles cook on high for 2 minutes.
    Chicken noodle soup cooked in Instant Pot.
    1. Step 4: Let the pressure release naturally before opening. Serve and enjoy with your favorite crackers. 
    Chicken noodle soup in a bowl.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    Think you're ready to try out this absolutely delicious recipe? Here are a few substitutions, tips, and tricks for making the best chicken noodle soup.

    • Chicken Matters: For a more robust flavor, consider using bone-in chicken or a mix of white and dark meat. Removing the bones later adds extra depth to the broth without compromising on tenderness.
    • Bayleaf Goodness: You can also add a bay leaf to the Instant Pot along with the chicken to add flavor to the chicken stock. Remember to remove the bay leaves from the pot after you're done cooking the chicken.
    • Finish with Freshness: Just before serving, toss in freshly chopped herbs—like parsley or thyme—and a squeeze of lemon. This brightens the dish and balances the savory notes perfectly.
    Serving chicken noodle soup with a spoon.
    Chicken noodle soup in a serving bowl.

    💭 FAQs

    Can I Use Dehydrated Chicken In Chicken Noodle Soup?


    When it comes to making chicken noodle soup, the type of chicken you use can make all the difference in the taste and texture of the dish.
    While some cooks may opt for fresh chicken, others turn to dehydrated chicken as a convenient alternative. But can you really use dehydrated chicken in chicken noodle soup?

    The answer is yes! In fact, dehydrated chicken can be a great option for adding flavor and protein to your soup, especially if you don't have fresh chicken on hand.

    Just be sure to follow the instructions on the package carefully and adjust the cooking time and liquid levels in your soup recipe accordingly.

    With a little creativity and experimentation, dehydrated chicken can be a tasty addition to any chicken noodle soup recipe.

    How To Store Chicken Noodle Soup


    You can store the leftover Instant Pot chicken noodle soup in the refrigerator for 2-3 days.

    How Do I Stop The Noodles From Breaking Down When Reheating?


    Reheat the soup in the microwave to keep the noodles from breaking down. If you're reheating it on the stovetop, make sure you turn the heat down to low and avoid stirring the noodle soup too much.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    These are my favorite sides to serve with Instant Pot Chicken Noodle Soup:

    • Crusty Bread or Rolls: Serve warm crusty bread or rolls on the side for dipping into the flavorful broth. It's perfect for soaking up every last bit of soup goodness.
    • Garlic Breadsticks: Whip up some garlic breadsticks or twists to accompany the soup. The garlic-infused butter and crispy texture make them a perfect match for dipping into the broth.
    Chicken noodle soup.

    🍽 More Instant Pot Recipes

    • Instant Pot Cajun Chicken and Rice.
      Instant Pot Cajun Chicken and Rice
    • Creamy Instant Pot Tortellini Recipe.
      Creamy Instant Pot Tortellini Recipe
    • Instant Pot Kielbasa And Cabbage.
      Instant Pot Kielbasa And Cabbage
    • Instant Pot Enchilada Soup.
      Instant Pot Enchilada Soup

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Chicken noodle soup in a bowl.

    Instant Pot Chicken Noodle Soup

    Angela Milnes
    Comfort yourself with a warm bowl of Instant Pot Chicken Noodle Soup! Tender chicken, savory broth, and perfectly cooked noodles come together in this classic soup.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 16 minutes mins
    Total Time 36 minutes mins
    Course Dinners
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Servings
    Calories 225 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 Chicken Leg Quarters
    • 5 cups Water
    • 1 tablespoon Minced Garlic
    • 1 teaspoon Dried Thyme
    • ½ teaspoon Salt
    • ½ teaspoon Pepper
    • 1 teaspoon Liquid Smoke
    • ½ Onion diced
    • 2-3 Carrots peeled and sliced
    • 2 cups Egg Noodles

    Instructions
     

    • Add water, chicken, spices, and liquid smoke to the instant pot. Seal the lid and pressure valve. Cook on high for 15 minutes.
    • Quick release pressure when done.
    • Remove and shred chicken. Set the cooked chicken aside.
    • Dice the onions to the desired size, and peel and slice the carrots. 
    • Add egg noodles, meat, and vegetables back to the instant pot. Seal the lid and pressure valve. Let the noodles cook on high for 2 minutes. Let pressure release naturally before opening.
    • Serve and enjoy with your favorite crackers. 

    Notes

    To make the chicken noodle soup healthier, you can use whole wheat egg noodles.
    I also like to add a bit of olive oil into the Instant Pot when I’m cooking the chicken.
    You can also add a bay leaf into the Instant Pot along with the chicken to add flavor to the chicken stock.
    Remember to remove the bay leaves from the pot after you’re done cooking time chicken.
    Don’t forget to top the soup with a generous squeeze of lemon juice and some chopped fresh parsley or any other fresh herb of your choice.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 225kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 14gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 82mgSodium: 114mgPotassium: 277mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 3469IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 34mgIron: 1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Also Add These Recipes To Your Menu:

    If you enjoyed this chicken noodle soup recipe and are inspired to try some more interesting chicken soup recipes or Instant Pot recipes, here are a few handpicked ones you might want to try.

    • Healthy Quinoa Salad Recipe
    • Easy Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    • Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream
    • Easy Buckwheat Pancakes
    • Grilled Sweet Potatoes
    • Instant Pot Kielbasa And Cabbage

    Does Coconut Oil Go Bad?

    August 19, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    two bottles of coconut oil and half fresh coconut.

    Are you as obsessed with coconut oil as we are? Does Coconut Oil Go Bad? This is a question we have set out to answer for you. Coconut Oil is a superfood that has been touted as a miracle remedy for everything from acne to hangnails, and the flavor is delicious in cookies, smoothies, curries - just about anything!

    But like other fats and oils, coconut oil can go bad. So how do you know if your coconut oil has gone bad and should be thrown out? Read on to discover what happens when coconut oil goes bad – plus learn some tips for keeping it fresh longer.

    Does Coconut Oil Go Bad?
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Does Coconut Oil Expire?

    Unlike other cooking oils, such as vegetable oil, Coconut oil boasts a naturally long shelf life. This is mainly due to the stability of its fatty acid chains. These chains are highly saturated, making them less likely to oxidize and, therefore, more spoilage-resistant.

    While it's true that coconut oil can eventually go bad, it typically lasts for about two years if stored properly. This longevity makes coconut oil a reliable staple in many kitchens, especially compared to other oils that tend to go rancid more quickly. However, checking for signs of spoilage like color, texture, or smell changes is always important.

    Does Coconut Oil Go Bad?

    Does Extra Virgin Coconut Oil Expire?

    Yes, like most edible products, virgin coconut oil does expire. However, it is known for its impressively long shelf life compared to other oils.

    The longevity of virgin coconut oil can be attributed to its high-fat content. The oil's quality and safety depend on proper storage methods.

    It can retain its quality for a long time if stored correctly.

    How Do You Know if Coconut Oil Has Gone Bad?

    These are the signs to look out for when identifying bad coconut oil:

    1. Expiration Date: Always verify the expiration date on the bottle or jar. Expired coconut oil may not necessarily be bad, but it's a good first indicator of its quality.
    2. Natural Coconut Scent and Flavor: Fresh oil has a natural coconut flavor and scent. It might have gone bad if the oil no longer smells or tastes like coconut.
    3. Sour Smell or Taste: If your coconut oil tastes sour, this is a clear sign that it's spoiled. Good coconut oil should have a neutral scent and taste when it's not flavored.
    4. Change in Color: Coconut oil should be clear when it's in liquid form and white when it's solid. If the oil starts to turn yellow or has dark oil spots, it's probably spoiled.
    5. Mold Growth: This is a sign that your coconut oil has gone bad. If you see any signs of mold growth, discard the oil immediately.
    6. Texture Changes: Coconut oil should maintain a smooth consistency. If it feels grainy or similar to curdled milk, it's likely spoiled.

    Is It Ok to Use Old Coconut Oil?

    Coconut oil is known for its longer shelf life if stored correctly. However, the oil quality may deteriorate as time passes, leading to a rancid odor, a clear sign of spoilage.

    When coconut oil surpasses its expiration date, it could become a hub for dangerous bacteria, escalating the chances of food-related diseases.

    So, while using old or expired coconut oil alone isn't necessarily dangerous, checking for signs of spoilage, such as a rancid odor, is crucial before use. Also, proper storage is key to extending its lifespan.

    How Long Does Coconut Oil Last Once Opened?

    Once opened, it can last up to two years, depending on the type and how it's stored.

    However, the lifespan can differ slightly, with refined coconut oil lasting about 18-36 months, while extra virgin coconut oil that can last three to five years.

    It's important to note that coconut oil takes a long time to oxidize, which means it takes a long time to go bad. But as with any other food product, it's always good to check for signs of spoilage, like color, smell, or taste changes.

    How Long Can You Keep Coconut Oil?

    Generally, with proper storage, it can maintain its quality for a duration ranging between 2 to 3 years.

     This is because coconut oil takes significant time to oxidize, meaning it doesn't go bad quickly.

    Some sources suggest that coconut oil can last between 2 to 5 years with appropriate storage, giving it one of the longest shelf lives among oils.

    Several factors must be considered to ensure the longest shelf life of your coconut oil in the best condition. One of these is light exposure.

    Store your coconut oil in a cool and dark location, avoiding direct sunlight exposure.

     Exposure to heat and light can accelerate oxidation, leading to quicker spoilage.

    Does Coconut Oil Go Bad?

    Use clean utensils when handling your coconut oil, and consider buying in smaller volumes to minimize waste.

    To prevent contamination that could speed up spoilage, always ensure that your hands or spoons used to scoop out the oil are clean.

    Storage containers are another important factor. Preserving coconut oil in a sealed container to minimize its contact with air can reduce oxidation risks and increase its shelf life. Glass jars with tight lids are often recommended for this purpose.

    How to Properly Store Coconut Oil?

    Here's how you store your coconut oil to increase its shelf life:

    In the Pantry:

    1. With a naturally long shelf life of up to two years, coconut oil is suitable for pantry storage.
    2. The pantry should be a dark and dry place.
    3. To maintain the freshness of coconut oil for an extended period, ensure it is kept in an airtight container.
    4. Avoid storing it in places with constant temperature or light changes.

    In the Fridge:

    1. Storing coconut oil in the fridge is not necessary.
    2. However, if you choose to do so, remember that the coconut oil will harden due to its low melting point.
    3. When you need to use it, take the jar of coconut oil out of the fridge and let it sit at room temperature for some time to soften.

    In the Freezer:

    1. Like the fridge, storing coconut oil in the freezer is also an option.
    2. This method will keep the coconut oil solid and extend its shelf life to up to five years.
    3. As with storage in the fridge, you will need to let the coconut oil sit at room temperature before use.

    FAQ'S

    What Does Coconut Oil Taste Like?

    The unique taste of fresh coconut oil is a pleasant fusion of sweet and nutty flavor. When you first taste it, there’s a mild sweetness reminiscent of the natural sugars found in fresh coconuts.
    This sweetness is followed by a subtle nuttiness that gives the oil its unique flavor. Fresh coconut oil is not overpowering but relatively pleasantly smooth, enhancing the flavors of the dishes it’s added to.

    Can You Still Use Rancid Coconut Oil?

    No. Whether refined or unrefined, coconut oil has a shelf-life and can become rancid, So spoiled coconut oil generally develops a distinctly sour taste or bitter smell, indicating that it’s time to throw it away.

    So, Does Coconut Oil Go Bad?

    Generally speaking, coconut oil is known for its longer shelf life if stored correctly. However, it may still deteriorate in quality as time passes, leading to a rancid odor indicating spoilage.

    It's essential not to use rancid coconut oil as it may contain harmful free radicals that can contribute to cell damage or worsen health conditions when consumed.

    When storing coconut oil, keeping it away from direct sunlight and in a sealed, airtight container is best. This will help extend its shelf life and ensure it remains of optimal quality for as long as possible.

    Always examine for any signs of spoilage in the coconut oil before using it or eating any food items that contain it. Doing so can help minimize your risk of exposure to any potential harm from consuming spoiled coconut oil alone.

    Strawberry Mojito Mocktail

    August 18, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Strawberry mojito mocktail in a glass jar.

    Packed with fresh strawberries and mint and a fizzy lime base, this Strawberry Mojito Mocktail recipe is the perfect refreshing drink for a hot summer day. If you don't drink alcohol, and are looking for an easy mocktail recipe to put together, this one can be a great choice to start.

    Strawberry Mojito Mocktail.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Delicious mocktail: With a wicked mint flavor, sweet strawberries and fresh lime to balance it all out, this strawberry mojito mocktail get full marks for its deliciousness.
    • Super easy to make: The simplicity of this virgin cocktail is another big plus. You'll need just a handful of ingredients to make this non alcoholic beverage.
    • Summer essential: The sweet flavor from the strawberries and mint and the tangy lime juice.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    To make a strawberry mojito mocktail, here's all you'll need.

    Strawberries, lemon, soda water and mint leaves.
    • Strawberries: Infuse the mocktail with a bright, fruity flavor and color.
    • Lemon: Adds a citrusy tang, contrasting nicely with the sweetness of the strawberries.
    • Sparkling water or soda water: Creates the fizzy base of the drink, offering refreshing effervescence.
    • Mint leaves: Crucial for attaining that authentic mojito taste, providing a fresh and aromatic note.
    • Ice cubes: Chill the drink, enhancing its cool, refreshing qualities.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Minty Pineapple Surprise: Add chunks of fresh pineapple and a few extra mint leaves to the recipe for a tropical twist. The combination of sweet pineapple and refreshing mint adds a delightful surprise to your mocktail mojito experience.
    • Blueberry Twist: Replace half of the strawberries with fresh blueberries for a colorful and flavorful twist on the classic recipe. Follow the same steps for preparation and enjoy the refreshing blend of strawberries and blueberries.

    🔪 How To Make A Strawberry Mojito Mocktail

    Strawberries and lemon slices in a glass jar.
    1. Step 1: Prepare strawberries and lemon by slicing them, and add mint leaves. Crush them directly in a jug. Gently muddle them using the back of your wooden spoon or a muddler. 
    Strawberries, ice cubes, and lemons in a glass jar.
    1. Step 2: Pour the beverage of your choice and stir everything together. Add ice and garnish with whole strawberries and the slices of lemon.
    Strawberry Mojito Mocktail.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    While making this virgin strawberry mojito is pretty easy, you might want to have these little tips and tricks handy to nail the recipe.

    • Fresh lime juice is the essence of this mojito mocktail. While you can always use packaged lime juice if that's what you have at hand, the freshness of the mint and lime is what makes this drink a true success.
    • Plus, you'll also be getting all that tangy pulp from the freshly squeezed lime juice and the muddled lime slices.
    • Depending on your taste buds, you can adjust the amount of individual ingredients you're adding to this strawberry mojito mocktail.
    • You don't necessarily need to use soda water or lime seltzer for this strawberry mocktail recipe. You can also choose to use a clear fizzy drink like Sprite or 7Up if you want to.
    • If you don't have fresh strawberries at hand, you can make do with frozen strawberries too. Just make sure you allow it to thaw a bit before you start to muddle it with your wooden spoon.
    Strawberry mojito mocktail jar.

    💭 FAQs

    What can I use instead of fresh strawberries for the mocktail?

    You can use frozen strawberries instead of fresh ones. Just thaw them slightly before muddling to ensure the best flavor.

    Can I make the mocktail with a different soda?

    Yes, you can use soda like Sprite or 7Up instead of soda water or lime seltzer for a sweeter, fizzy twist.

    How long can I store the strawberry mojito mocktail?

    The mocktail can be stored in the refrigerator for 1-2 days. If you want to store it longer, freeze it in ice cube trays and add fresh soda water when you're ready to serve.

    Can I customize the mocktail flavor?

    Yes, you can add variations like pineapple or blueberries to change the flavor profile while keeping the mojito's refreshing minty base.

    How to store a Mojito mocktail?

    Transfer the strawberry mocktail mojito into an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for up to 1-2 days.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    Here are some great recipes to serve with your strawberry mojito:

    • Caprese Skewers: Serve small skewers with cherry tomatoes, fresh mozzarella balls, and basil leaves drizzled with balsamic glaze. The light and refreshing flavors of the Caprese skewers contrast nicely with the fruity mocktail.
    • Smoked Salmon Bruschetta: Offer a platter of toasted baguette slices topped with salmon, garlic, basil, and a drizzle of olive oil. The savory and tangy flavors of bruschetta provide a satisfying contrast to the sweetness of the mocktail.
    • Mixed Green Salad: Serve a mixed green salad with a variety of fresh vegetables such as cucumber, bell peppers, and avocado, tossed in a light vinaigrette dressing. The crisp and refreshing salad provides a balanced accompaniment to the mocktail.
    • Fruit Platter: Offer a selection of fresh seasonal fruits such as watermelon, pineapple, grapes, and berries. The vibrant and juicy fruits complement the fruity flavors of the mocktail and provide a light and refreshing option.

    🍽 Sip On These Next

    • Homemade Strawberry Lemonade.
      Homemade Strawberry Lemonade -Refreshing Summer Drink!
    • Mangonada in a glass.
      Best Mangonada Recipe (Mango Chamoyada Drink)
    • Grapefruit Rosemary Mocktail.
      Grapefruit Rosemary Mocktail
    • Cranberry Lime Mocktail.
      Easy Cranberry Lime Mocktail Recipe – No Alcohol, All Sparkle!

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Strawberry mojito mocktail in a glass jar.

    Strawberry Mojito Mocktail

    Angela Milnes
    This vibrant, non-alcoholic drink combines muddled strawberries, zesty lime, fresh mint, and a splash of sparkling water for a sweet and tangy twist on the classic mojito.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 1 Serving
    Calories 4 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • ¾ cup Strawberries diced
    • ½ Lemon
    • 1 can Sparkling Water
    • 5-10 Mint Leaves
    • Ice optional

    Instructions
     

    • Prepare strawberries and lemon by slicing them, add mint leaves. Crush them directly in a jug. Gently muddle them using the back of your wooden spoon or a muddler. 
    • Pour beverage of your choice and stir everything together. 
    • Add ice and garnish with whole strawberries and slice of lemon.

    Notes

    Fresh lime juice is the essence of this mojito mocktail. While you can always use packaged lime juice if that's what you have at hand, the freshness of the mint and lime is what makes this drink a true success.
    Plus, you'll also be getting all that tangy pulp from the freshly squeezed lime juice and the muddled lime slices.
    Depending on your taste buds, you can adjust the amount of individual ingredients you're adding to this strawberry mojito mocktail.
    You don't necessarily need to use soda water or lime seltzer for this strawberry mocktail recipe. You can also choose to use a clear fizzy drink like Sprite or 7Up if you want to.
    If you don't have fresh strawberries at hand, you can make do with frozen strawberries too. Just make sure you allow it to thaw a bit before you start to muddle it with your wooden spoon.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 4kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 0.2gFat: 0.1gSaturated Fat: 0.01gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.03gSodium: 2mgPotassium: 28mgFiber: 0.4gVitamin A: 212IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 12mgIron: 0.3mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Interesting Recipes

    If you enjoyed trying your hands at this fantastic virgin strawberry mojito recipe, and are inspired to try some more easy to make recipes, here are a few good ones you might want to take a look at.

    • Berry Granola Bites
    • Raw Vegan Bread
    • Air Fryer Yellow Squash
    • Watermelon Juice
    • Mango Pineapple Smoothie
    • Banana Avocado Smoothie

    Best Raw Vegan Bread Recipe

    August 18, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Raw vegan bread topped with a tomato and cheese slice served on a tray.

    Looking for a hearty, healthy bread that’s grain-free, gluten-free, and totally raw? This raw vegan bread is chewy, satisfying, and packed with seeds and goodness—no baking required.

    Raw vegan bread in a dish.

    Raw vegan bread is gaining traction as more people look for unprocessed, plant-based alternatives to traditional loaves. It’s naturally gluten-free, flourless, and made using whole foods like flaxseeds, bananas, and mango. Whether you’re following a raw vegan diet, doing a detox, or just looking to switch up your sandwich game, this bread is a nourishing and versatile base for tons of meals.

    This recipe was inspired by my love of hearty seed breads and raw crackers—it’s kind of a cross between the two! I love pairing it with homemade hummus, beetroot dip, or even sliced avocado with chili flakes. You can even use it as a raw vegan sandwich bread for stacked veggie sandwiches or serve it alongside a chilled soup or peach caprese salad.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • My favorite part about this vegan bread recipe is the fact that it can be put together with just a few pantry staples.
    • You won't need to go hunting for any hard-to-find ingredients for this raw bread recipe.
    • It is actually a great way to enjoy raw food in a nice texture without having to turn on the oven.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Ingredients to make vegan bread.
    • Flaxseeds – The glue that holds it all together. I grind mine fresh for the best texture and flavor.
    • Sunflower Seeds – For structure, crunch, and plant-based power.
    • Coconut Flour – Adds a soft, bread-like texture and mild sweetness without overpowering the flavor. It’s super absorbent, so it helps bind everything together in raw, grain-free recipes like this one..

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Nut-free version – Use only seeds like sunflower, pumpkin, and hemp instead of almonds or walnuts.
    • Spice it up – Add garlic powder, onion flakes, chili, or cumin for a more savory bite.
    • No dehydrator? – Use your oven at the lowest temp with the door slightly open.
    • Want crunchier bread? – Dehydrate longer for a cracker-like texture that holds up well to dips.

    If you love this recipe you may also want to try this cranberry orange bread recipe, pumpkin bread with streusel or our whole wheat Irish soda bread recipe.

    🔪 How To Make Raw Vegan Bread

    Got all the ingredients ready? Here's what you need to do next to make the raw vegan bread.

    Oats, shredded mango, banana, and apple in a blender.
    1. Step 1: Mix the oats, shredded mango, banana, and apple in a high-speed blender or food processor until smooth.
    Making mixture for vegan bread in blender.
    1. Step 2: Add flaxseed and and coconut flour, keep blending for around 2-3 minutes. You can add ½ cup of water if the consistency is to thick. 
    Vegan bread mixture on a wooden board.
    1. Step 3: Transfer your mixture on to flat surface and try to form a bread loaf. Sprinkle the surface with coconut flour, if its to sticky to form a desired shape add 1 tablespoon of coconut flour. Sprinkle the bread with sunflower seeds, sesame seeds or any seeds of your choice, press them gently onto your bread so they stay in place.
    Raw vegan bread topped with flaxseeds in a dish.
    1. Step 4: Place your bread over dehydrator tray, set the temperature on 115F, you can also use an oven on its lowest settings (anything between 105-115F) Dehydrate for about 4 hours. Your bread is now ready to enjoy!

    💡Hint: Use silicone mats or parchment for easy flipping. Uniform thickness helps it dry evenly without cracking.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    Ready to try out this amazing recipe? Here are a few more tips and tricks you might want to take note of.

    • Use finely ground flaxseed – It helps the dough hold together better and gives the bread a smoother, more cohesive texture.
    • Flip halfway – If using a dehydrator or oven, flipping the bread halfway through helps it dry evenly and makes it easier to peel off the tray.
    Two loaves of raw vegan bread.

    💭 FAQs

    Is raw bread real bread if it’s not baked?

    Yes! It’s more like a dense, chewy flatbread or a raw vegan sandwich bread. It holds together, slices well, and works great as a base for spreads or toppings.

    Can I use a conventional oven instead of a dehydrator to make raw bread?

    Yes, you can prepare raw bread using an oven set to a low temperature, typically around 115°F (46°C). Keep the oven door slightly ajar to allow moisture to escape, mimicking a dehydrator's environment. This method helps preserve the bread's enzymes and nutrients, though a dehydrator may provide more consistent results.

    How long does raw vegan bread last?

    Store in the fridge for up to 5 days, or freeze for up to 1 month. Layer slices with parchment so they don’t stick together.

    Is raw vegan bread gluten-free?

    Yes, raw vegan bread is typically gluten-free. It's made from nuts, seeds, and vegetables, avoiding traditional wheat flour. However, always check the ingredient labels to ensure no gluten-containing additives are included.

    Can I Freeze Raw Vegan Bread?

    Yes! Freeze individual slices with parchment between layers and thaw as needed.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    This raw vegan bread is super versatile. Here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

    • Topped with mashed avocado and chili flakes.
    • Spread with cashew cream or edamame hummus and stacked with sprouts
    • Served alongside a beet feta salad or kale apple salad.
    • Cut into strips and used as dippers for baba ganoush or raw soups.
    • Top with nut butter and sliced fruit or slather on some homemade mango chutney for a sweet snack
    Raw vegan bread ready to be served.

    🍽 More Simple Vegan Recipes

    • Easy Vegan White Bean Stew.
      Easy Vegan White Bean Stew
    • Vegan Beetroot And Black Bean Burger.
      Vegan Beetroot And Black Bean Burger
    • Best Vegan Baked Beans Recipe
    • Best Vegan Fall Harvest Salad.
      Best Vegan Fall Harvest Salad

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Raw vegan bread topped with a tomato and cheese slice served on a tray.

    Vegan Raw Bread

    Angela Milnes
    Discover a wholesome and nourishing treat with this Vegan Raw Bread! Made from a blend of seeds, nuts, and fresh veggies.
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 4 hours hrs 40 minutes mins
    Additional Time 5 hours hrs
    Total Time 9 hours hrs 50 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 605 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ cup Oats
    • 1 Banana
    • 1 cup Coconut Flour
    • ½ cup Flaxseed
    • 1 Mango
    • 1 Apple
    • ⅓ cup Black Sesame Seeds
    • ½ cup Sunflower Seeds

    Instructions
     

    • Mix oats and shredded mango, banana and apple in a high speed blender or a food processor. Blend until smooth, add flaxseed and and coconut flour, keep blending for around 2-3 minutes. You can add ½ cup of water if the consistency is to thick. 
    • Transfer your mixture on to flat surface and try to form a bread loaf. Sprinkle the surface with coconut flour, if its to sticky to form a desired shape add 1 tablespoon of coconut flour.
    • Sprinkle your bread with sunflower seeds, sesame seeds or any seeds of your choice, press them gently onto your bread so they stay in place.
    • Place your bread over dehydrator tray, set the temperature on 115F, you can also use an oven on its lowest settings (anything between 105-115F) Dehydrate for about 4 hours.

    Notes

    If you like an extra crispy bread leave it for an additional hour or cut the bread into individual slices, place in on a tray it and continue to dehydrate it for additional hour. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 605kcalCarbohydrates: 71gProtein: 19gFat: 30gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 13gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gSodium: 76mgPotassium: 689mgFiber: 25gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 613IUVitamin C: 24mgCalcium: 214mgIron: 6mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Air Fryer Yellow Squash (Crispy Slices in 15 Minutes!)

    August 18, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Air fried yellow squash served on plate.

    Need a quick way to cook up that garden haul? These air fryer yellow squash slices are crispy, healthy, and ready in under 20 minutes with just a handful of ingredients!

    Air Fryer Yellow Squash On A Plate.

    When your backyard garden or weekend market run gives you more squash than you know what to do with, this recipe is your summer savior. It's the easiest way to use fresh squash in the air fryer and turns a humble veggie into something golden, flavorful, and completely snackable.

    These air fryer squash slices are roughly 50 kcal per serving, making this a low-calorie, high-flavor side dish—a great pick for clean eating and low-carb diets. Be sure to check out our healthy Crispy Air Fryer Avocado Fries or simple and fast Harissa Sweet Potato recipes too!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Quick & crispy: Using the air fryer means you get lightly browned, tender squash in no time.
    • Naturally healthy: Low carb, low calorie, and perfect for a clean summer side dish.
    • Big flavor, minimal effort: A few simple spices bring out the best in every bite of squash.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Air Fryer Yellow Squash Ingredients.

    You'll need a few basic ingredients to make these air fryer squash slices.

    • Yellow Squash: Sweet, mild, and soft when roasted—this summer squash holds up beautifully in the air fryer. I go for ¼-inch rounds for the best texture.
    • Paprika & Garlic Powder: These simple pantry spices add tons of flavor without any fuss. Paprika brings a warm, smoky note, while garlic powder gives that familiar savory boost.
    • Olive Oil: Just a small drizzle helps the seasoning stick and gives that golden roasted finish.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Zucchini’s Plus-One: Combine yellow squash in the air fryer with zucchini, cherry tomatoes, or red onion for a colorful veggie medley.
    • Cheesy Goodness: Sprinkle with Parmesan or nutritional yeast before cooking for extra flavor.
    • Spicy Kick: Add chili flakes, Cajun seasoning, or peri peri spice for a fiery edge.
    • Crispy Coated: Toss slices in panko and grated Parmesan to make squash “chips.”
    • Herb-Infused Magic: Finish with rosemary, thyme, or fresh parsley right after air frying.
    • Make it a Bowl: Add cooled summer squash slices to a grain bowl with quinoa, arugula, cherry tomatoes, and a lemon vinaigrette.

    Craving more veggie sides? Try my Air Fryer Cauliflower With Teriyaki Sauce or Air Fryer Baked Potato.

    🔪 How To Make Air Fryer Yellow Squash

    Slicing yellow squash on a wooden board.
    1. Step 1: Slice the squash to ¼” thick and preheat your air fryer to 400°F. 
    Seasoning yellow squash slices in a bowl.
    1. Step 2: Add squash to a mixing bowl. Toss in oil and spices. Fully coat the squash. 
    Seasoned yellow squash slices in an air fryer.
    1. Step 3: Place each slice of squash in the air fryer basket; do not place them on top of one another.  
    Cooked yellow squash slices in an air fryer.
    1. Step 4: Cook each batch at 400°F for 15 minutes.

    💡Pro Tip: If you love extra crispiness, try slicing the squash thinner and cooking for just 8–10 minutes instead. Thinner cuts cook faster and get golden edges with less time.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • Dry squash before seasoning for the best texture—no soggy slices here.
    • Don’t overcrowd the basket or you’ll end up steaming instead of crisping.
    • Breadcrumb bonus: For extra crunch, coat air fryer squash slices in seasoned breadcrumbs after tossing with oil.
    • Shake or rotate halfway: Air circulation is key! Shaking the basket or flipping the slices at the halfway point (around 8 minutes) helps cook the squash evenly on all sides.
    Cooked yellow squash slices on a plate with a fork.

    💭 FAQs

    Do I need to peel yellow squash before air frying?

    No, there's no need to peel yellow squash before cooking. The skin is tender and edible, contributing to the dish's color and nutritional value.

    How thick should I slice the squash for air frying?

    Aim for slices about ½ inch thick. This thickness allows the squash to cook evenly, achieving a tender interior with a slightly crispy exterior.

    How long to cook squash in air fryer at 400°F?

    15 minutes is the sweet spot. Flip halfway through for even browning.

    Can I use zucchini instead of summer squash?

    Absolutely. Zucchini and yellow summer squash are interchangeable and roast beautifully together.

    What seasonings go well with air fryer summer squash?

    Try ranch seasoning, onion powder, Italian herbs, or even curry powder for a fun twist.

    How do I store and reheat leftover squash?

    Let squash slices cool completely, then store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in the air fryer at 370°F for 3–5 minutes to bring back the crisp.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    Wondering what to serve with your air fryer squash slices:

    • Serve as a Side Dish: Pair the air fryer with grilled meats like chicken or steak for a balanced, low-effort meal.
    • Top with Parmesan: After air frying, sprinkle with freshly grated Parmesan cheese for a deliciously savory finish.
    • Combine with Other Veggies: Serve alongside other roasted vegetables like zucchini, bell peppers, or carrots to create a colorful, nutritious veggie platter.
    • As a Snack: Enjoy these air fryer squash slices on their own as a healthy snack, or dip them in a tangy yogurt or ranch dressing.
    Air fried yellow squash slices on a plate.

    🍽 Try More Fantastic Air Fryer Sides

    • Air Fryer Bok Choy on a white plate covered in paprika.
      Air Fryer Bok Choy
    • Air Fryer Carrot Fries.
      Crispy Air Fryer Carrot Fries
    • How To Roast Peppers In Air Fryer.
      How To Roast Peppers In Air Fryer
    • Air Fryer Crispy Chicken Wings.
      Air Fryer Crispy Chicken Wings

    Did you make these air fryer squash slices? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Air fried yellow squash served on plate.

    Air Fryer Summer Squash

    Angela Milnes
    Savor the simplicity and flavor of Air Fryer squash slices! Lightly seasoned and cooked to perfection, this yellow squash comes out tender on the inside with a slight crisp on the outside.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Vegetables
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 50 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 Yellow Squash
    • ½ teaspoon Paprika
    • ½ teaspoon Garlic Powder
    • ¼ teaspoon Pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon Salt
    • 1 tablespoon Olive Oil

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat your air fryer to 400°f. 
    • Slice the squash to ¼” thick. 
    • Add squash to a mixing bowl. Toss in oil and spices. Fully coat the squash. 
    • Place each slice of squash in the air fryer basket, do not place them on top of one another.  
    • Cook each batch at 400°f for 15 minutes. Let cool and serve.  

    Notes

    • Dry squash before seasoning for the best texture—no soggy slices here.
    • Don’t overcrowd the basket or you’ll end up steaming instead of crisping.
    • Breadcrumb bonus: For extra crunch, coat air fryer squash slices in seasoned breadcrumbs after tossing with oil.
    • Shake or rotate halfway: Air circulation is key! Shaking the basket or flipping the slices at the halfway point (around 8 minutes) helps cook the squash evenly on all sides.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 50kcalCarbohydrates: 4gProtein: 1gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.5gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 0.5mgSodium: 24mgPotassium: 273mgFiber: 1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 320IUVitamin C: 17mgCalcium: 17mgIron: 0.5mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!
    Cooked yellow squash slices on a plate.

    Banana Chocolate Chip Cookies

    August 15, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Banana chocolate chip cookies.

    Banana Chocolate Chip Cookies are the perfect blend of sweet bananas and rich chocolate chips, making them a delightful treat for any time of day. Grab your apron, and let's create some magic in the kitchen with this foolproof recipe!

    Banana chocolate chip cookies on a table.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Banana Utilization: My favorite part about this recipe is the fact that I can actually use up my overripe or ripe bananas as well!
    • Texture and Flavor: These banana chocolate chip cookies have a chewy texture, are lightly browned, and have that crunch factor from the chopped nuts, perfectly balanced with the chocolate chips.
    • Banana Bread Lover's Delight: If you love banana bread, you'll absolutely love these cookies.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    • Cold Unsalted Butter (Cubed): Contributes to the cookie's structure and adds a rich, creamy flavor.
    • Eggs (Room Temp): Act as the binding agent that holds all the ingredients together, while also adding moisture.
    • Mashed Ripe Bananas: These mashed bananas lend a moist, soft texture to the cookies and infuse them with a gentle, fruity sweetness.
    • Cake Flour: Has less protein than all-purpose flour, resulting in a lighter, more tender cookie.
    • Crushed Banana Chips: Add a crunchy texture and reinforce the banana flavor, making the cookies even more unique and tasty.
    • Candied Walnuts: Give a sweet, nutty crunch that complements the soft, chewy texture of the cookies.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    🔪 How To Make Banana Chocolate Chip Cookies

    In the bowl of a stand mixer or an electric mixer, cream butter, mashed banana, and the sugars, on low speed for 1-2 minutes.

    Increase speed to medium to high and continue beating for another 2-3 minutes until the mixture is light and airy, Scrape down the sides of the bowl with a spatula.

    Add in the eggs, one at a time, vanilla extract to the creamed mixture, mixing well after each addition.

    In a large bowl add the baking soda, cornstarch, salt, and cake and all-purpose our, whisk to combine.

    Add the flour mixture to the butter mixture 1 cup at a time. Mix until incorporated.

    Split the chocolate chips, banana chips, and candied walnuts into two bowls. Add 1 medium bowl of the chocolate chip banana walnut mixture, and mix on low speed until combined or just use a wooden spoon.

    Cover the bowl with plastic wrap. Chill in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes.

    Using your large cookie scoop, scoop out large dough portions. Now using your hands shape the chilled dough into large dough balls

    Preheat the oven to 400 degrees.

    Cover the entire surface of the dough balls with chocolate banana walnut mixture. Make sure all gaps are covered.

    Place the dough balls on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.

    Bake the dough balls on the prepared cookie sheets. Sprinkle each dough ball with crystalized sugar.

    Bake in the center rack of the oven for 15 minutes.

    Remove from the oven and let cool for at least 15 minutes on the baking sheet.

    Serve the cookies once cooled, or store them in an airtight container at room temperature to enjoy later.

    Banana chocolate chips cookies on a table with banana slices.

    Expert Tips For Getting Chewy Banana Cookies

    • Caramel Flavor: I've used light brown sugar for this recipe because it has a more caramel-y flavor and color. If you don't have brown sugar, you can just stick to using white sugar instead.
    • Soft and Chewy Texture: These banana chocolate chip cookies have the perfect soft and chewy texture, but if you're craving for that extra softness and richness, you can use egg yolk instead of whole eggs.
    • Extra Chocolate Flavor: To give these banana cookies a bit of extra chocolate flavor, you can add some more chocolate chips to it too!

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Almond Flour: If you want to try a gluten-free version of these cookies, you can use almond flour instead of regular all-purpose flour.
    • Baking Powder: If you don't have the baking soda that the recipe calls for, you can use baking powder instead. Using baking powder will give your cookies a finer, smoother texture as opposed to the coarser, crumbly texture that baking soda will give.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    These banana chocolate chip cookies are basically banana bread in a cookie form. Think of them as banana bread cookies.

    • Vanilla Ice Cream: A scoop of creamy vanilla ice cream adds a cold, smooth contrast to the chewy texture of the cookies.
    • Warm Caramel Sauce: Drizzle warm caramel sauce over the cookies for an extra layer of sweetness.
    • Nut Butter Spread: Serve with a side of almond or peanut butter for a delicious, nutty complement.
    • Fresh Fruit: Slices of strawberries or a mixed berry medley can provide a fresh, tangy balance to the rich banana flavor.

    Best Way To Store Banana Cookies

    • I always love making a double batch of these banana chocolate chip cookies, allow them to cool completely before I transfer them to an airtight container.
    • Store In A Cool Dark Place: Your leftover cookies can be stored in an airtight container in a cool and dark place for up to 3 days.

    💭 FAQs

    Can I Use Overripe Bananas For This Recipe?

    Absolutely! I prefer ripe bananas for their perfect texture and sweetness, but slightly overripe ones work too. Overripe bananas are sweeter, so you can reduce the sugar in the recipe.

    Can I Make Vegan Cookies?

    You sure can! You can skip the egg in the recipe and use any liquid egg replacement of your choice. Coconut oil or vegan butter can be a good substitute for the butter in this recipe.

    Can I Prep The Cookie Dough In Advance?

    You sure can! You can make the cookie dough in advance, cover it up in cling wrap or plastic wrap and then freeze it until you're ready to use it.

    🍽 Cookies, Cookies, and More!

    • Chocolate peanut butter cookies on a tray.
      Chocolate Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Best Brown Butter Cookies Recipe.
      Best Brown Butter Cookies Recipe
    • Crispy Peanut Butter Cookies.
      Crispy Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Chewy Chocolate Peppermint Cookies.
      Chewy Chocolate Peppermint Cookies

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Banana chocolate chip cookies.

    Banana Chocolate Chip Cookies

    Angela Milnes
    Enjoy a delightful twist on a classic with Banana Chocolate Chip Cookies! These soft and chewy cookies blend the sweet, comforting flavors of ripe bananas with gooey chocolate chips in every bite.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Desserts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 Servings
    Calories 1322 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup Cold Unsalted Butter cubed
    • 1 cups Granulated White Sugar
    • ½ cup Light Brown Sugar
    • 2 Eggs room temp
    • 1 tablespoon Vanilla Extract
    • 1 cup Mashed Ripe Banana
    • 1 teaspoon Baking Soda
    • 1 teaspoon Cornstarch
    • 1 teaspoon Salt
    • 1 ½ cups Cake Flour
    • 1 ½ cups All Purpose Flour
    • 2 cups Dark Chocolate Chips 1 cup divided
    • 2 cups Semi Sweet Chocolate Chips 1 cup divided
    • 2 cups Crushed Banana Chips 1 cup divided
    • 2 cups Candied Walnuts 1 cup divided

    Instructions
     

    • In the bowl of a stand mixer or an electric mixer, cream butter, mashed banana, and the sugars, on low speed for 1-2 minutes.
    • Increase speed to medium to high and continue beating for another 2-3 minutes until the mixture is light and airy, Scrape down the sides of the bowl with a spatula.
    • Add in the eggs, one at a time, vanilla extract to the creamed mixture, mixing well after each addition.
    • In a large bowl add the baking soda, cornstarch, salt, cake our and all-purpose our, whisk to combine.
    • Add the flour mixture to the butter mixture 1 cup at a time. Mix until incorporated.
    • Split the chocolate chips, banana chips and candied walnuts into two bowls. Add 1 medium bowl of the chocolate chip banana walnut mixture, and mix on low speed until combined or just use a wooden spoon.
    • Cover the bowl with plastic wrap. Chill in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes.
    • Using your large cookie scoop, scoop out large dough portions. Now using your hands shape the chilled dough into large dough balls
    • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees.
    • Cover the entire surface of the dough balls with chocolate banana walnut mixture. Make sure all gaps are covered.
    • Place the dough balls on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper.
    • Bake the dough balls on the prepared cookie sheets. Sprinkle each dough ball with crystalized sugar.
    • Bake in the center rack of the oven for 15 minutes.
    • Remove from the oven and let cool for at least 15 minutes on the baking sheet.
    • Serve the cookies once cooled, or store them in an airtight container at room temperature to enjoy later.

    Notes

    Caramel Flavor: I've used light brown sugar for this recipe because it has a more caramel-y flavor and color. If you don't have brown sugar, you can just stick to using white sugar instead.
    Soft and Chewy Texture: These banana chocolate chip cookies have the perfect soft and chewy texture, but if you're craving for that extra softness and richness, you can use egg yolk instead of whole eggs.
    Extra Chocolate Flavor: To give these banana cookies a bit of extra chocolate flavor, you can add some more chocolate chips to it too!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 1322kcalCarbohydrates: 151gProtein: 16gFat: 73gSaturated Fat: 44gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 105mgSodium: 810mgPotassium: 813mgFiber: 10gSugar: 89gVitamin A: 826IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 218mgIron: 6mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Cookie Recipe Ideas

    • Valentine Cookies
    • Red Velvet Cookies
    • Reese’s Cookies With Popcorn
    • Chocolate Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Holiday Spiced Cookies
    • Homemade Pumpkin Cookies
    • Easy Halloween Cookies

    Vegan Summer Fruit Tart Recipe

    August 14, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Summer fruit tart on a serving plate.

    This Summer Fruit Tart Recipe is bright, juicy, and naturally sweetened—everything you want in a healthy summer dessert.

    Summer fruit tart on a serving plate.

    This fruit tart became a summer staple in our house when we had more nectarines and mint than we knew what to do with. It’s light, naturally sweetened, and easy to customize with whatever fruit’s in season.

    It also pairs beautifully with summer drinks from the blog like my Cranberry Lime Mocktail, Mangonada or refreshing Strawberry Mint Sangria.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Tasty Spin: A fresh take on the classic fruit tart with unique texture and flavor from the crust.
    • Naturally Sweet: No powdered sugar or additives—just the goodness of ripe summer fruit.
    • Vegan-Friendly: Completely dairy-free and egg-free, with a wholesome plant-based filling.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Ingredients for summer fruit tart.
    • Oatmeal: I use rolled oats for their hearty texture and toasty flavor—they make the crust feel more wholesome and satisfying.
    • Coconut Oil & Coconut Paste: These bind the crust and add a subtle tropical note I love in summer desserts. They're my go-to for dairy-free baking.
    • Thick Coconut Yogurt: This gives the tart its creamy base. I use an extra thick one for a satisfying bite that contrasts beautifully with juicy fruit.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    This tart is endlessly flexible! Use what’s in your fruit bowl or fridge, and try layering in creams, glazes, or custards for fun twists. Here are some of our favorite ways to switch it up:

    • Fruit Options: Use whatever’s in season—berries, peaches, kiwi, even citrus.
    • Berry Season Bonus: Top with blueberries, raspberries, or strawberries for a tart packed with antioxidants.
    • Citrus Glaze: Brush lemon or lime glaze over the fruit for extra shine and zing.
    • Custard Layer: Add a layer of custard before fruit for a creamy contrast.
    • Cream Cheese or Pastry Cream: Layer with vanilla pastry cream sweetened with your choice of natural sweetener.
    • Apricot Glaze: Use a pastry brush to glaze apricot preserves or jam for a glossy finish.
    • Frangipane Almond Tart: Swap in almond frangipane for a baked version—nutty, rich, and bakery-style.

    If you love light and fresh summer bakes, check out my Lemon Pudding Cake, or pair your tart with a chilled Strawberry Mojito Mocktail for the ultimate sunny-day treat.

    🔪How To Make This Summer Fruit Tart Recipe

    making summer tart base.
    1. Step 1: Melt coconut oil and paste. Stir in syrup. Grind half the oats, seeds, and peanuts. Combine with remaining oats and mix into crumbly dough.
    summer tart base.
    1. Step 2: Grease tart pan. Press dough evenly into the pan using wet hands.
    adding yogurt to tart.
    1. Step 3: Bake at 356°F for 20–25 minutes or until golden. Cool completely. Gently loosen and transfer crust to serving platter. Spread coconut yogurt evenly.
    Best Summer Fruit Tart
    1. Step 4: Layer fruit—start with chopped larger fruit and berries, then alternate colors and textures. Garnish with fresh mint.

    💡Hint: Blind bake and cool the crust a day in advance. Keep the filling chilled separately, and assemble right before serving to maintain crispness and freshness.

    Best Summer Fruit Tart

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • Classic Crust Option: Want that buttery, French tart feel? Swap the crust for a classic shortbread base.
    • Flavor Boost: Add vanilla bean paste, almond extract, or citrus zest to your yogurt filling.
    • Crust Consistency: Make sure the crust is even in thickness to bake uniformly. Use pie weights if needed.
    • Small Tarts: Use mini tart pans for individual servings—reduce bake time accordingly.
    Best Summer Fruit Tart

    💭 FAQs

    What fruits work best for this summer fruit tart?

    Berries, peaches, citrus, kiwi, nectarines, and plums all work beautifully. Mix and match based on what’s ripe and in season.

    Can I make the tart crust gluten-free?

    Yes! This recipe already uses oats, seeds, and peanuts to keep it gluten-free.

    How do I prevent the crust from getting soggy?

    Cool it completely before filling. Store it loosely covered in the fridge to avoid moisture buildup.

    Can I customize the filling?

    Absolutely! You can add custard, cream cheese, or even vanilla pastry cream to the filling. Feel free to experiment with lemon or lime glaze for extra flavor.

    Best way to store this summer fruit tart.

    Keep in the fridge for 2–3 days, loosely covered with foil or plastic wrap. Avoid airtight containers to preserve crust texture.

    Best Summer Fruit Tart

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    These pair perfectly with a slice of summer fruit tart:

    • Crème Fraîche: Adds tangy richness and balances sweet summer fruit.and protein-focused to stay bariatric-smart and satisfying!
    • Whipped Cream: A dollop on the side, flavored with vanilla or citrus zest.
    • Vanilla Ice Cream: A creamy contrast to the tartness of the fruit.
    Best Summer Fruit Tart

    🍽 More Summer Recipes To Try

    • Easy No Bake Lavender Cheesecake.
      Creamy Lavender Cheesecake (15 Minutes Prep)
    • Chick Fil A Kale Crunch Salad in a white bowl.
      Best Kale Crunch Salad Chick Fil A Recipe
    • No-Churn Vegan Mango Sorbet.
      No-Churn Vegan Mango Sorbet
    • Creamy Tuscan Salmon With Sundried Tomatoes.
      Creamy Tuscan Salmon With Sundried Tomatoes

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Summer fruit tart on a serving plate.

    Vegan Summer Fruit Tart Recipe

    Angela Milnes
    Brighten up your dessert table with this stunning Summer Fruit Tart! A buttery, flaky crust is filled with a creamy custard and topped with an array of fresh, juicy summer fruits.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Desserts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Servings
    Calories 248 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ cups Oatmeal
    • ⅕ cup Pumpkin Seeds
    • ⅕ cup Peanuts
    • 3 tbsp. Coconut Oil
    • 3 Tbsp. Coconut Paste
    • 2-3 tbsp. Carob Syrup or any organic syrup
    • 2-3 tbsp. Water
    • 1 ½ cups Coconut Yogurt Thick
    • ¼ Cup Apricots
    • ¼ Cup Red Currants
    • ¼ Cup Strawberries
    • ¼ Cup White Raspberries
    • ¼ Cup Gooseberries
    • ¼ Cup Red Raspberries

    Instructions
     

    • Melt coconut oil and paste in microwave. Add the syrup and stir the mixture.
    • Grind half of the oats, seeds and peanuts in a coffee grinder. Place the remaining cereal and ground ingredients in a bowl. Stir to combine. Add water in batches to make a crumbly dough.
    • Grease the mold with butter. Place the dough in the mold. Spread with wet hands to form a rim. 
    • Bake in a preheated 356°F oven for 20-25 minutes until golden. Cool the tart.
    • With a toothpick, run a toothpick between the mold and the tart. With care, transfer the base to a serving platter. Spread the yogurt into the tart.
    • Add the chopped large fruit and berries first. Then lay out the rest, alternating the bright berries in color and shape. Decorate with mint leaves.
    • A real summer dessert is ready. Serve it with refreshments and enjoy!

    Notes

    • Classic Crust Option: Want that buttery, French tart feel? Swap the crust for a classic shortbread base.
    • Flavor Boost: Add vanilla bean paste, almond extract, or citrus zest to your yogurt filling.
    • Crust Consistency: Make sure the crust is even in thickness to bake uniformly. Use pie weights if needed.
    • Small Tarts: Use mini tart pans for individual servings—reduce bake time accordingly.
    • Gloss Like a Pro: Brush with warmed apricot jam or lemon curd for a bakery-style finish.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 248kcalCarbohydrates: 26gProtein: 7gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.002gCholesterol: 3mgSodium: 52mgPotassium: 354mgFiber: 5gSugar: 14gVitamin A: 174IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 141mgIron: 1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Great Recipe Ideas

    If you enjoyed making these fruit tarts, and are looking for some more fun and interesting recipe ideas, here are a few handpicked ones to try out.

    • Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler
    • Best Plantain Tortillas Recipe
    • Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream
    • Easy Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
    • Blueberry Smoothie Bowl Recipe
    • Homemade Bagel Chips
    • Simple Birthday Charcuterie Board

    Best Make Ahead Caprese Skewers

    August 14, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Caprese skewers on a wooden board ready to be served.

    These Best Make Ahead Caprese Skewers are sweet, savory, and so simple. Cherry tomatoes, creamy mozzarella, and fresh basil get stacked on skewers and drizzled with tangy balsamic glaze for a bite-sized appetizer that looks impressive but takes just minutes to prep.

    Caprese Skewers

    These mini Caprese skewers are the perfect no-cook appetizer for summer BBQs, holidays, or quick snacks. They're light, elegant, and super easy to throw together. I often prep a big batch for entertaining, and they always vanish fast!

    For more fresh bites, check out our Balsamic Grilled Vegetables or Salmon Sushi Balls.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Easy to prep ahead: Perfect for parties and gatherings.
    • Fresh and flavorful: Juicy tomatoes, creamy mozzarella, and fragrant basil never miss.
    • Crowd-pleasing presentation: They look beautiful on a platter with minimal effort.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Caprese Skewers Ingredients.
    • Cherry Tomatoes: Sweet and juicy, they bring bright flavor and a pop of color.
    • Fresh Mozzarella Balls: Soft and creamy, they balance the acidity of the tomatoes.
    • Basil Leaves: Add a fresh herbal aroma that ties everything together.
    • Balsamic Glaze: The sweet-tangy finish that elevates these skewers from simple to sensational.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Add Olive Oil: A light drizzle of extra virgin olive oil adds richness.
    • Switch the Mozzarella: Try burrata or bocconcini if you prefer a different texture.
    • Use Honeydew or Watermelon: Swap cantaloupe for a sweet twist.
    • Cheesy Upgrade: Slide in a cube of feta or goat cheese for more flavor.
    • Flavor Boost: Sprinkle with Italian seasoning or sea salt before serving.

    If you love easy appetizers like this, try our Shrimp Cucumber Bites or Caprese Mini Pizzas next.

    🔪 How To Make The Best Make Ahead Caprese Skewers

    Caprese Skewers
    1. Step 1: On a skewer place 2 small pearls of mozzarella. Then add a basil leaf. You can fold them in half if they're too big. Then add a cherry tomato or use two cherry tomatoes if they're smaller in size.
    Caprese Skewers
    1. Step 2: Then add another basil leaf. And add 2 small mozzarella pearls again. Repeat until you run out of ingredients. Drizzle balsamic glaze and season with black pepper to taste.

    💡 Hint: You can also choose to marinate the creamy mozzarella balls overnight in some olive oil to get some extra flavor to them. Then, all you need to do is add them into the little skewers.

    Caprese Skewers

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • Use uniform-sized tomatoes and mozzarella for the best presentation.
    • Store covered in the fridge, but add basil and glaze just before serving.
    • Make the glaze from scratch by simmering balsamic vinegar until thick.

    Caprese Skewers

    💭 FAQs

    Can I make Caprese skewers in advance?

    Yes! Assemble ahead of time and refrigerate. Add basil and glaze just before serving for best results.

    What cheese works best if I don’t have mozzarella?

    Try bocconcini, feta cubes, or even mini burrata if you’re feeling fancy.

    What is the best way to store leftover Caprese skewers?

    Store in an airtight container for up to 2 days. Replace wilted basil before serving again.

    Can I use grape tomatoes instead?

    Absolutely! Grape or cherry tomatoes both work great, just aim for uniform size.

    How do I get the best flavor?

    Use high-quality balsamic glaze and fresh, in-season produce.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    Here are some great sides to serve with your make ahead caprese skewers:

    • Crusty Bread: Perfect for mopping up any extra glaze.
    • Antipasto Platter: Pair with olives, salami, and marinated artichokes.
    • Bruschetta: Serve alongside tomato bruschetta or roasted red pepper toast.
    • Grilled Vegetables: Zucchini, eggplant, or asparagus work beautifully.
    • Mixed Green Salad: Add a refreshing crunch to balance the rich mozzarella.
    Caprese Skewers

    🍽 More Easy Appetizer Recipes

    • Salmon Sushi Balls Recipe.
      Salmon Sushi Balls Recipe
    • Mini Pigs In Blankets.
      Mini Pigs In Blankets
    • Smoked Texas Twinkies with Bacon And Brisket.
      Smoked Texas Twinkies with Bacon And Brisket
    • Roasted Cherry Tomato Burrata Bruschetta.
      Burrata Bruschetta With Roasted Cherry Tomatoes

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save

    Caprese skewers on a wooden board ready to be served.

    Make Ahead Caprese Skewers

    Angela Milnes
    Crafted with the simple ingredients you'd find in a Caprese salad, these caprese skewers are a total winner whether you're looking for a quick afternoon snack or a nice appetizer.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 Servings
    Calories 16 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 12 Cherry Tomatoes
    • ½ cup Mozzarella Pearls
    • 24 Fresh Basil Leaves
    • 1 tablespoon Balsamic Glaze
    • ½ teaspoon Black Pepper or to taste

    Instructions
     

    • Once you have all your ingredients ready, here's what you'll need to do to make caprese skewers.
    • On a skewer place 2 small pearls of mozzarella. Then add a basil leaf. You can fold them in half if they're too big.
    • Then add a cherry tomato or use two cherry tomatoes if they're smaller in size. Then add another basil leaf.
    • And add 2 small mozzarella pearls again. Repeat until you run out of ingredients.
    • Drizzle balsamic glaze and season with black pepper to taste.

    Notes

    Based on what you can find, you can use either cherry or grape tomatoes to make these mini caprese skewers.
    Check your local grocery store for the best, fresh mozzarella balls, grape or cherry tomatoes and basil leaves.
    To make sure the caprese skewers look nice and balanced, try to get your hands on grape tomatoes or cherry tomatoes that are roughly the same size as the mozzarella balls.
    If you don't have the balsamic glaze that the recipe calls for, you can simply make it yourself by reducing balsamic vinegar in a small saucepan on low heat until it gets a nice, thicker consistency.
    You can also add some garlic powder to the balsamic reduction if you want some extra flavor.
    Also remember to season the caprese salad skewers well with salt and pepper to get them to have the best flavor.
    You can also choose to drizzle some olive oil over the skewers if you want to.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 16kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 1gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.01gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.003gCholesterol: 2mgSodium: 102mgPotassium: 39mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 125IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 18mgIron: 0.1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Air Fryer Cauliflower With Teriyaki Sauce

    August 13, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Air fryer cauliflower with teriyaki sauce and sesame seeds.

    If you love roasting cauliflower, you definitely need to give this Air Fryer Cauliflower recipe a try. The seasoned cauliflower florets are air fried until crispy and then tossed in a delicious savory sauce that'll take your taste buds on a ride.

    air fryer cauliflower covered in sesame seeds and green onion.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • My favorite part about this crispy cauliflower recipe is the fact that it is actually healthier than most other fried cauliflower recipes out there since I use the Air Fryer to make it.
    • You'll be amazed at how easily you can transform this healthy vegetable into a wickedly delicious side dish or even a main dish if you want to.
    • This Teriyaki Cauliflower recipe can pair perfectly with Air Fryer Salmon Bites. Check it out!

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Ingredients to make cauliflower in air fryer.
    • Cauliflower: The main ingredient, it offers a hearty texture and subtle flavor.
    • Panko Breadcrumbs: Creates a crunchy crust when air-fried.
    • Milk: Used to create a coating for cauliflower florets.
    • Flour: Aids in forming a perfect coating on the cauliflower.
    • Seasonings: Enhances the overall flavor of the dish.
    • Ginger And Garlic: Key ingredients for the teriyaki sauce, adding depth and heat.
    • Brown Sugar: Provides sweetness to balance the savory flavors.
    • Soy Sauce: Infuses umami flavor into the cauliflower.
    • Honey: Gives the sauce a glaze-like finish.
    • Sesame Seeds: Adds crunch and visual appeal.
    • Scallions: Introduces a fresh element to the dish.
    • Cornstarch: Optional, but useful for thickening the sauce.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Use a mix of curry powder and smoked paprika in the coating and air fry the cauliflower to turn it into a nice Indian Air Fryer cauliflower that can be an incredible side dish.
    • You can add some more heat to the air-fried cauliflower by adding some chili powder and lemon juice to the coating mixture.
    • Smoked paprika can be another great addition to pick.

    🔪 How To Make Air Fryer Cauliflower

    Uncooked cauliflower florets in a bowl.
    1. Step 1: Start by cutting the cauliflower into florets. Preheat the Air Fryer.
    Mixing milk, flour, garlic powder, onion powder, salt and pepper in a bowl.
    1. Step 2: In a large bowl, add the milk, flour, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper. Whisk until well combined.
    Coating cauliflower florets with panko.
    1. Step 3: Add your cauliflower florets to the bowl with milk and cover all florets. Then put your cauliflower in the panko crumbs and make sure all florets are covered with the panko.
    Coated cauliflower florets in an air fryer basket.
    1. Step 4: Place the florets in the Air Fryer in a single layer. Air fry for 20 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit. While the cauliflower is cooking, make your teriyaki sauce.
    Soy sauce mixture in a pan.
    1. Step 5: Add the water, soy sauce, brown sugar, honey, minced garlic, and minced ginger in a saucepan and cook on medium-high heat until the water has evaporated and the sauce becomes thicker. This can take about 10-15 minutes.
    Air fried cauliflower florets in a bowl.
    1. Step 6: Once the cauliflower florets are cooked, pour the teriyaki sauce over the florets and garnish with sliced scallions and sesame seeds. Serve immediately.
    Air fried cauliflower florets in a bowl.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    While making Air Fryer cauliflower is super easy, you might want to keep these additional tips and tricks in mind too.

    • While Air Fryers are designed to make the cauliflower crisp without any oil or fat needed, I would recommend drizzling a bit of olive oil over the cauliflower when you add it to the Air Fryer basket to make it even more crispy.
    • If you don't have olive oil, you could always use some avocado oil or any other cooking oil of your choice.
    • Just like most other Air Fryer recipes, remember to toss the contents of the basket halfway through the cooking process.
    • While I would highly recommend using fresh cauliflower for air frying, you can also choose to use frozen cauliflower if you want to.

    💭 FAQs

    Can I use frozen cauliflower for this recipe?

    Yes, you can use frozen cauliflower, but make sure to thaw and pat it dry before air frying. Frozen cauliflower may release more moisture, so drying it helps achieve the crispy texture.

    How do I make the teriyaki sauce from scratch?

    Making homemade teriyaki sauce is easy! Combine soy sauce, honey or brown sugar, garlic, ginger, and a splash of rice vinegar in a pan. Simmer it until it thickens, and you'll have a flavorful sauce ready to coat your cauliflower.

    Can I add other vegetables to the air fryer along with the cauliflower?

    Absolutely! Bell peppers, zucchini, or broccoli work great in the air fryer and pair well with the teriyaki sauce. Just make sure to cut them into similar-sized pieces for even cooking.

    How do I get the cauliflower extra crispy?

    To get the cauliflower extra crispy, make sure to spray it lightly with oil before air frying. The oil helps create a golden, crispy texture, and avoid overcrowding the basket to allow hot air to circulate evenly around the cauliflower.

    Best Way to Store Roasted Cauliflower

    If you have any leftover cauliflower that you want to store for later, just allow it to cool down before you transfer it to an airtight container. This can be refrigerated for 2-3 days, and then reheated in the Air Fryer. You can prepare the teriyaki sauce days in advance and refrigerate it. Then, all you need to do is cook the cauliflower in the Air Fryer when you want to and toss it in the sauce.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    • You can serve this Air Fryer cauliflower with any tasty dipping sauce of your choice. I personally love teaming the crispy cauliflower with some sour cream, Caesar Dressing or even some hot sauce.
    • You can also top the cooked cauliflower with a generous sprinkle of freshly grated parmesan cheese and some chopped fresh parsley right before you serve.
    • Cauliflower goes well with Poached Chicken, Bang Bang Salmon and Texas Smoked Turkey Breast.
    • You could also drizzle some fresh lemon juice or lime juice over the top if you want to for some extra vitamin C.
    Air fried teriyaki cauliflower florets in a bowl.

    🍽 More Fantastic Dinners

    • Hawaiian Garlic Shrimp.
      Hawaiian Garlic Shrimp Recipe (20 Minutes, So Flavorful!)
    • Instant Pot Wild Rice Blend With Pomegranates.
      Instant Pot Wild Rice Blend With Pomegranates
    • Carrot And Raisin Salad With Pineapple.
      Carrot And Raisin Salad With Pineapple
    • Cold Chicken Pasta Salad With Italian Dressing.
      Cold Chicken Pasta Salad With Italian Dressing

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Air fryer cauliflower with teriyaki sauce and sesame seeds.

    Air Fryer Cauliflower With Teriyaki Sauce

    Angela Milnes
    Enjoy a flavorful and healthy snack with Air Fryer Cauliflower with Teriyaki Sauce! Crispy air-fried cauliflower florets are tossed in a deliciously sweet and savory teriyaki glaze.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Vegetables
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 300 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 Cauliflower Head
    • 1.5 cups Panko Breadcrumbs
    • 1 cup Milk of your choosing (I used soy milk)
    • ½ cup Flour
    • ½ teaspoon Garlic Powder
    • ½ teaspoon Onion Powder
    • ¼ teaspoon Salt or to taste
    • ¼ teaspoon Black Pepper or to taste
    • 1 Scallion for garnish
    • 1 tablespoon Sesame Seeds for garnish
    • ½ cup Water
    • ¼ cup Soy Sauce
    • ¼ cup Brown Sugar
    • 2 tablespoon Honey
    • 2 cloves Garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon Ginger minced
    • 1 tablespoon Corn Starch optional if you want to make the sauce sticky – not used in recipe

    Instructions
     

    • Start by cutting the cauliflower into florets. Preheat Air Fryer.
    • In a large bowl, add the milk, flour, garlic powder, onion powder, salt and pepper. Whisk until well combined.
    • Add your cauliflower florets to the bowl with milk and cover all florets. Then put your cauliflower in the panko crumbs and make sure all florets are covered with the panko.
    • Place the florets in the Air Fryer in a single layer. Air fry for 20 minutes on 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • While the cauliflower is cooking, make your teriyaki sauce.
    • Add the water, soy sauce, brown sugar, honey, minced garlic, minced ginger in a sauce pan and cook on medium high heat until the water has evaporated and the sauce becomes thicker.
    • This can take about 10-15 minutes.
    • Once the cauliflower florets are cooked, pour the teriyaki sauce over the florets and garnish with sliced scallions and sesame seeds. Serve immediately.
    • Once the cauliflower florets are cooked, pour the teriyaki sauce over the florets and garnish with sliced scallions and sesame seeds. Serve immediately.

    Notes

    While Air Fryers are designed to make the cauliflower crisp without any oil or fat needed, I would recommend drizzling a bit of olive oil over the cauliflower when you add it to the Air Fryer basket to make it even more crispy.
    If you don't have olive oil, you could always use some avocado oil or any other cooking oil of your choice.
    Just like most other Air Fryer recipes, remember to toss the contents of the basket halfway through the cooking process.
    While I would highly recommend using fresh cauliflower for air frying, you can also choose to use frozen cauliflower if you want to.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 300kcalCarbohydrates: 57gProtein: 9gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gCholesterol: 8mgSodium: 1172mgPotassium: 243mgFiber: 2gSugar: 27gVitamin A: 129IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 158mgIron: 3mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Delicious Recipe Ideas

    If you enjoyed making this easy Air Fryer cauliflower recipe, and are inspired to try some more Air Fryer recipes or just other delicious recipes in general, here are a few good ideas.

    • Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese
    • Purple Cauliflower Recipe (Mashed Cauliflower)
    • Citrus And Honey Roasted Beets
    • Crispy Air Fryer Avocado Fries
    • Weight Watchers Crustless Pumpkin Pie
    • Old Fashioned Sloppy Joes recipe With Ketchup
    • Creamy Cajun Pasta Sauce with Parmesan
    Serving air fried cauliflower floret with a fork.

    Easy Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti With Spinach

    August 13, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Shrimp scampi spaghetti with spinach in a bowl.

    This easy Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti is an absolutely delicious pasta recipe with the right balance of savory, tangy, and creamy flavors. It is the perfect recipe to try when you're looking for an easy weeknight dinner that packs in veggies, carbs, and protein. This has to be the best shrimp scampi recipe ever.

    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Simple: The simplicity of the recipe and its perfect savory flavors are a total hit in my household.
    • Kids Love It: I'm actually making this shrimp scampi for dinner tonight, and I'm pretty sure once you give it a try, it'll become a favorite family dinner in your household too.

    If you love our shrimp scampi recipe then be sure to try this Bang Bang Shrimp recipe or give the following shrimp dishes a try: Shrimp Cakes With Hot Sauce, Fiery Ginger Garlic Shrimp, Crispy Coconut Shrimp with Orange Marmalade Dip and Shrimp Ceviche.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    To make the shrimp scampi spaghetti, here's what you'll need.

    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti Ingredients
    • Spaghetti: The base of the dish, provides a platform for the sauce and shrimp.
    • Raw Shrimp: The star ingredient, adding a delicious seafood flavor.
    • Cherry Tomatoes: Offer a tangy contrast to the rich sauce.
    • Fresh Spinach: Boosts the dish's nutritional value and adds color.
    • Heavy Cream: Infuses the dish with a rich, creamy texture.
    • Onion: Deepens the flavor profile with its savory notes.
    • Garlic: Enhances the dish's overall flavor with its aromatic presence.
    • Green Pesto: Serves as a flavorful sauce base, lending a herby punch.
    • Parmesan Cheese: Adds a salty, nutty finish to the scampi.
    • Seasonings: Salt and pepper fine-tune and balance the dish's flavors.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Lemon: You can serve the shrimp scampi spaghetti pasta with some lemon wedges on the side.
    • Italian Seasoning: You can also add some Italian seasoning into the pasta sauce if you want to.
    • Fresh Herbs: Don't forget to top the pasta dish with some chopped fresh parsley and crushed red pepper flakes to add a nice touch of freshness.

    🔪 How To Make Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti

    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    1. Step 1: Wash all your produce. Dice the onion. Mince the garlic. Half the cherry tomatoes.
    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    1. Step 2: In a large pan, heat olive oil, add diced onions and cook for about 3-5 minutes on medium heat, or until lightly browned. Then add garlic and cook for another minute, or until fragrant, stirring occasionally.
    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    1. Step 3: Add the peeled shrimp and cook for about 5 minutes, or until light pink. Season with salt and pepper.
    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    1. Step 4: Then add the pesto, stir until well combined.
    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    1. Step 5: Add the heavy cream, stir, and let simmer for a few more minutes.
    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti
    1. Step 6: Then add the diced cherry tomatoes. Let simmer for 2 minutes on medium-high heat. Then add the spinach, cook for 3 more minutes, and remove from the heat. Mix the cooked spaghetti in the sauce and divide it over 4 serving bowls. Top with parmesan cheese and serve immediately.
    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    Think you're ready to try out the shrimp scampi spaghetti recipe? Wait up! You might want to keep these little tips and tricks in mind too.

    • You can also skip adding the cream and turn it into a nice garlic shrimp dish instead.
    • When cooking the pasta, I would highly recommend reserving about a cup of pasta water to add to the sauce.
    • To add extra flavor and deliciousness to the pasta, you can use chicken broth instead of salted water to cook the pasta.
    • I've used regular salt to season the dish, but remember to taste the dish and adjust seasoning before you serve.
    • You can also choose to use kosher salt for the boiling salted water before you add pasta into it.
    • I would highly recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe. It really adds that extra flavor to the garlicky sauce.
    • Red pepper flakes, lemon juice and some lemon zest can also be wonderful additions to the shrimp scampi pasta. The lemon juice helps tenderize the cooked shrimp and lends a beautiful lemon flavor which balances out the heat from the red pepper flakes.
    • To bring some rich flavors to the dish, you can use garlic butter instead of olive oil. Don't forget a dahs of Italian seasoning and some chopped freshly parsley as well.
    shrimp scampi in a black bowl with cherry tomatoes.

    💭 FAQs

    What type of shrimp works best in this dish?

    For a balanced flavor and texture, choose medium-large shrimp that have been peeled and deveined. This size allows for a tender bite without overpowering the pasta.

    Can I use a different pasta instead of spaghetti?

    Absolutely. While spaghetti is classic, you can try linguine or even a gluten-free variety if that suits your dietary needs or taste preferences.

    Is it possible to mix in other vegetables?

    Yes, feel free to add extra veggies. Many home cooks toss in cherry tomatoes or even a handful of arugula for a peppery kick alongside the spinach.

    How do I ensure the shrimp stay perfectly tender?

    Watch them closely! Once the shrimp turn pink and curl slightly, they’re done. Typically, this means cooking them for just a couple of minutes on each side to avoid any rubbery texture.

    Best Way to Store Scampi Spaghetti

    Your leftover shrimp scampi spaghetti can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 2-3 days.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    Shrimp scampi is a classic dish bursting with flavor, so it's wonderful to pair it with sides that complement its savory and tangy profile. Here are some delicious options:

    • Pizza Garlic Bread: Serve garlic bread on the side to soak up the delicious sauce from the shrimp scampi. You can use crusty Italian Bread or baguette slices, brushed with garlic-infused butter and toasted until golden brown.
    • Air Fryer Vegetables: Air fry a medley of vegetables such as Broccoli, Air Fryer Asparagus, and carrots to add freshness and color to the meal. Season them lightly with salt and pepper, or drizzle with a squeeze of lemon juice for extra zing.
    • Caesar Chicken Salad: A classic Caesar salad with crisp romaine lettuce, garlic croutons, and tangy Caesar Dressing is a great complement to shrimp scampi. The crunchy texture and bold flavors of the salad provide a nice contrast to the richness of the dish.
    • Bruschetta: Serve some Roasted Cherry Tomato Bruschetta as an appetizer or side dish. Top toasted bread slices with a mixture of diced tomatoes, garlic, basil, olive oil, and balsamic vinegar.
    Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti

    🍽 More Pasta Recipes

    • Ground Turkey Pasta.
      Ground Turkey Pasta
    • Jamaican Jerk Pasta With Shrimp.
      Jamaican Jerk Pasta With Shrimp
    • Italian sausage and broccoli pasta in a skillet.
      Creamy Italian Sausage And Broccoli Pasta (With Mascarpone)
    • Creamy Cajun Pasta Sauce with Parmesan.
      Creamy Cajun Pasta Sauce with Parmesan

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Shrimp scampi spaghetti with spinach in a bowl.

    Easy Shrimp Scampi Spaghetti

    Angela Milnes
    This delicious shrimp scampi recipe is super tasty, easy to cook and packed with vitamins and minerals for a healthy family meal
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Additional Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinners
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 772 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 lbs Spaghetti
    • 1 lbs Raw Shrimp peeled and divined
    • 1 pint Cherry Tomato
    • 4 oz Fresh Spinach
    • 1 cup Heavy Cream
    • 1 Onion
    • 1 bulb Garlic
    • 2 tablespoon Green Pesto
    • Salt to taste
    • Black Pepper to taste
    • Parmesan Cheese

    Instructions
     

    • Cook the pasta in a large pot according to the package instructions until al dente.
    • Wash all your produce. Dice the onion. Mince the garlic. Half the cherry tomatoes.
    • In a large pan, heat olive oil, add diced onions and cook for about 3-5 minutes on medium heat, or until lightly browned.
    • Then add garlic and cook for another minute, or until fragrant, stirring occasionally.
    • Add the peeled shrimp and cook for about 5 minutes, or until light pink. Season with salt and pepper.
    • Add the pesto, stir until well combined. Add the heavy cream, stir, and let simmer for a few more minutes.
    • Add the diced cherry tomatoes. Let simmer for 2 minutes on medium high heat. Then add the spinach, cook for 3 more minutes, and remove from heat.
    • Mix the cooked spaghetti in the sauce and divide over 4 serving bowls. Top with parmesan cheese and serve immediately.

    Notes

    When cooking the pasta, I would highly recommend reserving about a cup of pasta water to add to the sauce.
    To add extra flavor and deliciousness to the pasta, you can use chicken broth instead of salted water to cook the pasta.
    I’ve used regular salt to season the dish, but remember to taste the dish and adjust seasoning before you serve.
    You can also choose to use kosher salt for the boiling salted water before you add pasta into it.
    I would highly recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe. It really adds that extra flavor to the garlicky sauce.
    Red pepper flakes, lemon juice and some lemon zest can also be wonderful additions to the shrimp scampi pasta. The lemon juice helps tenderize the cooked shrimp and lends a beautiful lemon flavor which balances out the heat from the red pepper flakes.
    To bring some rich flavors to the dish, you can use garlic butter instead of olive oil. Don’t forget a dahs of Italian seasoning and some chopped freshly parsley as well.
    You can also skip adding the cream and turn it into a nice garlic shrimp dish instead.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 772kcalCarbohydrates: 97gProtein: 35gFat: 27gSaturated Fat: 15gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 211mgSodium: 771mgPotassium: 897mgFiber: 6gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 4467IUVitamin C: 38mgCalcium: 185mgIron: 3mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Interesting Recipes

    If you're looking for more pasta recipes or shrimp recipes or just more interesting recipes in general, here are a few great recipe options to pick from.

    • Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream
    • Best Plantain Tortillas Recipe
    • Best Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler Recipe
    • Coconut Red Curry Mussels
    • Sheet Pan Chicken Fajitas
    • Zucchini Egg Bake Recipe
    • Creamy Pumpkin Alfredo
    • Mini Cheese Stuffed Peppers
    • Salmon Sushi Balls Recipe
    • Creamy Potato and Sausage Chowder

    11+ Fantastic Ways To Eat Raw Beets

    August 12, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Different ways to eat raw beetroot.

    Eating beetroot has many health benefits, but how do you get raw beets into your diet? Here are 15 fantastic and tasty ways to eat raw beets! You'll love these recipes as much as I do and bonus! they are all super quick and easy to make.

    Different Ways To Eat Raw Beets.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Can You Eat Raw Beets?

    Yes! You can absolutely eat raw beets. In fact, they are a great source of Vitamin C and Fiber, as well as folate and manganese. Eating raw beets has even been linked to lower levels of inflammation in the body. There are many ways to enjoy them and these recipes are sure to be a hit!

    Chioggia Beets.

    What Can I Do With Raw Beets?

    Raw beets can be incorporated into salads, served as a side dish, or blended into juices or smoothies. They can also be enjoyed on their own with some spices and herbs for added flavor.

    Are Beets Healthier Raw Or Cooked?

    You can get some great health benefits from both cooked and raw beets. Eating them raw means you may enjoy more beneficial vitamins, minerals, and enzymes, while cooking beets can make certain nutrients more available for absorption.

    Cooked beetroots.

    What Are The Health Benefits Of Eating Raw Beets?

    Eating raw beets has a whole host of health benefits. For starters, they are an excellent source of vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. Beetroot is a great health food and is very low in calories, but it can provide us with the essential nutrients we need to stay healthy.

    Beetroot is also a great source of vitamin C, potassium, magnesium, and iron. Eating raw beets can help boost your immune system, reduce cholesterol levels, and regulate blood pressure.

    Beetroot is good for your blood vessels, whether eaten raw or cooked beets it can help increase blood flow and reduce high blood pressure.

    Beetroot juice in a glass.

    Raw Beets Promote Good Digestion

    Eating raw beets is also known to help reduce inflammation in the body, improve blood circulation and even improve digestive health.

    Even when people enjoy roasted beets or cooked beetroot, the benefits of raw beets are tremendous.

    Ready to start eating raw beets? Here are 11+ delicious ways to enjoy them:

    Healthy Raw Beet Salad

    This Raw Beet Salad is a delicious and easy salad that you can whip up in no time. Just combine sliced raw beets with your favorite greens, such as spinach or kale, and some fresh herbs like basil or parsley. Then top it off with some nuts, feta cheese and a simple vinaigrette dressing for an unforgettably tasty meal.

    Learn how to make this basic raw beet salad today!

    Raw beet salad.

    Rainbow Spring Rolls

    Make a veggie spring roll using raw beets, carrots, mango and peppers. This simply and easy recipe uses raw beets and other colorful veggies that are rolled up in a refreshing springroll wrap.

    These Rainbow Spring Rolls make an amazing appetizer or side dish and can be topped off with your favorite sauces for added flavor. Get the recipe here!

    Rainbow spring rolls with raw beets.

    Raw Beet And Carrot Noodle Salad

    Noodle salads are always a great option for lunch or dinner. To make this Raw Beet and Carrot Noodle Salad, simply spiralize 2 medium-sized beets and one large carrot and mix it up with some cooked noodles of your choice.

    Top it off with some chopped celery, red onion, shredded cheese, and a homemade vinaigrette dressing for a perfect summer meal!

    Get the recipe for raw beet and carrot noodle salad here!

    Raw Beet And Carrot Noodle Salad.

    Beet Hummus

    This Raw Beet Hummus is both flavorful and nutritious! Simply combine raw beets with canned chickpeas, olive oil, garlic, and lemon juice to make a delicious dip.

    Serve it up as an appetizer or snack with fresh veggies or crackers for a healthy treat!

    Learn how to make Beet Hummus today!

    beetroot hummus.

    Beetroot Juice

    Beetroot juice is one of the healthiest beverages around and making it is super easy.

    Just blend together peeled and cubed raw beets with your favorite fruit juice, such as orange or apple, for a refreshing treat.

    Beetroot juice can help lower blood pressure and boost energy levels. Learn how to make it here! Tasty Beetroot Juice.

    Beetroot juice in a glass.

    Raw Beet Soup

    Raw beet soup is a great way to enjoy the flavor of beets without the need to cook them.

    Simply blend together some diced raw beets, onions, garlic and vegetable broth for a creamy and delicious soup.

    Top it off with your favorite herbs and spices for extra flavor. Get the recipe for raw beet soup here!

    Raw Beet Soup.

    Beetroot Smoothie Bowl

    This Beetroot Smoothie Bowl is an easy and tasty way to enjoy raw beets.

    Simply blend together some raw beets, banana and your favorite non-dairy milk for a creamy smoothie that you can top off with fresh fruits and nuts.

    Learn how to make this Beetroot Smoothie Bowl here!

    beetroot smoothie.

    Raw Beet And Cabbage Sauerkraut

    Sauerkraut is a great way to enjoy the benefits of raw beets and cabbage.

    To make this Raw Beet And Cabbage Sauerkraut, simply mix together shredded beets, carrots and cabbage with enough salt water to cover them.

    Pack the mixture tightly into a jar, place it in a warm spot for a week or two and viola! You have delicious Raw Beet And Cabbage Sauerkraut.

    Learn how to make it here!

    beet kraut in a jar.

    Beet And Chickpea Salad

    This Beet And Chickpea Salad is a simple and nutritious salad that you can make in no time.

    Just combine cooked chickpeas, diced raw beets, cherry tomatoes and some fresh herbs with a balsamic vinaigrette dressing for an amazing vegan meal.

    Get the recipe for beet and chickpea salad here!

    Beet and chickpea salad.

    Beetroot Carpaccio

    Beetroot carpaccio is an elegant dish that is surprisingly easy to make.

    Simply add thinly sliced beets and top off with fresh herbs, olive oil, lemon juice and freshly grated parmesan cheese.

    This dish is a great way to enjoy the flavor of raw beets without having to cook them! You'll love our simple recipe for Beetroot Carpaccio.

    Beetroot carpaccio with rocket leaves and oil.

    Raw Beet Burgers

    These raw beet sunflower burgers are a delicious and nutritious veggie burger option.

    Just mix together diced raw beets, sunflower seeds, oats, garlic and tahini for a tasty vegan patty.

    Serve it up with your favorite toppings or enjoy as is! Get the recipe for raw beet burgers here!

    Raw Beet Burgers.

    Why Eat Raw Beetroot?

    Raw veggies are full of essential vitamins, minerals and antioxidants that help keep us healthy.

    Eating raw vegetables such as raw beetroot is also a great way to get the most out of your produce as cooking them up can reduce their nutrient content.

    Eating raw beets and other vegetables is a great part of the Whole Food Plant Based Diet. By eating beets raw you can enjoy the health benefits of beets.

    Raw beetroots.

    But I Prefer Cooked Beets

    That's great too! Cooked beets are still a healthy option and can be enjoyed in so many ways.

    Roast up some beets with fresh herbs and seasonings for a tasty side dish or add them to soups and salads as an extra boost of nutrition.

    You can also mash or puree cooked beets into dips, spreads and sauces. Cooked beets can also be used to make sweet treats like raw vegan beet brownies or delicious smoothie bowls.

    Raw beets offer great taste and tons of health benefits, but cooked beets are still a healthy and tasty option as well!

    Crushed beetroot.

    How Many Beets Can I Eat?

    As with all foods, it's important to not go overboard. The USDA recommends eating 4-5 cups of raw or cooked vegetables per day.

    Be sure to add in a variety of veggies, including beets, into your daily diet for the optimal health benefits!

    Eating too many beets can lead to digestive issues and discolored urine and stool so it's best to stick to the recommended daily amount.

    So whether you choose to eat them raw or cooked, beets are a nutritious and delicious addition to your diet! Enjoying them in moderation offers great health benefits for both body and mind.

    beetroot juice.

    Enjoy The Different Ways To Eat Beets

    Whether it's sliced beets, pickled beets, raw beet juice, beet greens, Roast Beets, Canned Beets or golden beets, the benefits of these root vegetables are fantastic. Cook beets or eat beets raw as part of your everyday diet and reap the benefits of consuming beets for your body!

    What Do Beetroots Taste Like

    August 12, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Raw beetroots.

    If you've been wondering what do beetroots taste like, you're in luck - now is your chance to find out!

    We'll explore all beetroot flavors and textures, considering raw and cooked versions of this healthy vegetable. So open up your kitchen cupboards, and let's get cooking beetroot!

    Fresh beetroots.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Does Raw Beet Taste Like?

    Beets have a distinct flavor that can be described as sweet yet earthy. The earthy smell of beets is quite prominent, so some people compare eating beets to tasting the soil itself.

    However, this comparison does not deter beet lovers who find the unique flavor appealing. When eaten raw, beets taste more intense, and their crunchy texture adds another layer of sensory experience.

    The sweetness of raw beets can be a pleasant surprise, but the earthy undertone really sets them apart. For those whose taste buds are more attuned to milder flavors, the strong taste of beets might be overwhelming.

    Do Beets Have A Sweet Taste?

    Raw beets usually taste sweet. This earthy vegetable is known for its high sugar content, which gives it a uniquely sweet taste compared to other vegetables.

    When cooked or roasted, the natural sugars in beets caramelize, enhancing their sweet flavor. The sweetness of beets can complement a variety of dishes, from salads to juices, and can balance out more savory or bitter flavors.

    What Do Canned Beets Taste Like?

    Canned beets offer a unique taste experience that differs from fresh beets. They possess a milder flavor, a characteristic that sets them apart.

    The canning process tends to soften the robust earthiness of fresh beets, resulting in a more subtle, sweet, and tangy taste.

    This milder flavor makes canned beets versatile, as they can seamlessly blend into various dishes without overpowering other ingredients.

    Beetroots in a jar.

    What Does Beet Juice Taste Like?

    Fresh beetroot juice has an earthy flavor derived from it, which gives it a robust character.

    This juice has a mild sweetness that counterbalances its earthiness, making it a unique and enjoyable beverage for those who appreciate its distinct taste.

    Beetroot juice in a glass.

    What Do Roasted Beets Taste Like?

    The heat from roasting caramelizes the sugars within the beets, leading to an earthy, sweet, comforting, and refreshing taste.

    This process brings out a deep, rich flavor, almost wine-like, which pairs beautifully with various dishes. In essence, the natural sweetness of roasted beets offers a unique taste sensation that leaves a memorable impression on your palate and a healthy option for your wholefoods diet.

    Roasted beetroots in a glass.

    Do Pickled Beets Taste Good?

    Pickled beets usually have a tart flavor profile, balanced with a mild sweetness inherent in the natural sugars in the beets.

    This combination creates a vibrant, tangy taste with warm, earthy notes, appealing to a broad spectrum of palates. Adding spicy peppers or pepper seeds can add an unexpected kick to the pickled beets, creating a fusion of exciting and delicious flavors.

    The heat from the peppers contrasts beautifully with the sweet and sour beetroot, making them an even more versatile addition to dishes like salads, sandwiches, and wraps.

    Pickled beetroots in a jar.

    What Covers Up The Taste Of Beets?

    Most people dislike beets because of their soil-like flavor; with the proper preparation and cooking methods, you can modify the flavor of beets to cater to your taste buds.

    There are various ways to prepare beets to reduce the "dirt-like" taste. A popular method is to mix beets with coconut oil; the sweet, nutty flavor of the coconut oil helps offset the beets' strong taste.

    In addition, incorporating citrus zest into your beet dishes can enhance their flavor profile. The tangy, fresh notes of citrus zest, such as orange or lemon, can effectively balance out the sweetness of the beets and add an exciting twist to your dish.

    Is Beet Better Raw, Boiled, Or Cooked?

    When eaten raw, beets retain their firm texture, and the earthy taste is more pronounced, which appeals to those who already love beets for their distinct flavor.

    However, when you cook beets, they become tender, and their sweetness gets enhanced, which can make them more palatable for some people. The earthy taste becomes more subtle and is often complemented by the flavors of other ingredients used in cooking.

    Boiling beets have a less intense flavor, become more tender, and are easier to consume, but they might also reduce some of their nutritional content.

    While eating beets raw is perfectly safe and nutritious, boiling them can soften their texture and make them more palatable for some people.

    Beet Varieties And Their Tastes

    Red Beets:

    Red beets are the most common variety in grocery stores. These beets have a sweet flavor that is quite distinctive. Their deep red color can bleed into other foods, making them a natural food dye.

    Sugar Beets:

    As the name suggests, sugar beets are a bit sweeter than other varieties. They are primarily grown for sugar production due to their high sucrose content. The taste of sugar beets is often described as exceptionally sweet and slightly earthy.

    Chioggia Beets:

    Named after a town in Italy, Chioggia Beets are known for their unique candy-striped interior. They have a sweet, mild flavor that is less earthy than red beets. These beets are perfect for raw preparations as cooking can fade their beautiful stripes.

    Golden Beets:

    Golden beets are a variety that stands out for their vibrant yellow-orange color. They have a sweeter and more mellow flavor compared to red beets. Golden beets don't bleed like red beets, making them a versatile addition to salads and other dishes.

    Cylindra Beets:

    This variety is named for its long, cylindrical shape. The taste of Cylindra beets is very similar to red beets. They have mild and sweet taste. They are a bit easier to slice due to their shape.

    Baby Beets:

    Baby beets are simply younger versions of any beet variety. They are harvested early, resulting in a softer, more tender texture and a slightly milder flavor. They are perfect for roasting or pickling.

    White Beets:

    White beets are less common than other beet varieties. They have a mild flavor that's less sweet than other beets, with a slightly peppery finish.

    What Pairs With Beetroot?

    Here are some dishes that use beetroot

    1. Roasted Beet Hummus: This dish uses cooked beets and blends them with chickpeas, tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, and garlic to create a vibrant, creamy hummus. The unique flavor of beets complements the tartness of lemon and the creaminess of tahini and olive oil perfectly.
    2. Beet and Goat Cheese Pairing: Roasted beets and goat cheese have become popular due to their contrasting flavors. The sweet, earthy flavor of the beets beautifully balances the tangy, creamy consistency of the goat cheese.
    3. Sheet Pan Roasted Beets: Roasting beets bring out their natural sweetness. Mix them with olive oil and your selected spices, then roast until they are soft and beautifully caramelized.
    4. Cooking Beets: Whether you prefer to roast or steam beets, these cooking methods can bring out the earthy flavor of this root vegetable. Cooked beets can be enjoyed in various dishes, from salads to desserts.
    5. Beets in Egg Scrambles: Adding cooked beets to egg scrambles can provide a pop of color. You might also enjoy the contrast between the earthy flavor of the beets and the rich, savory eggs.

    Enjoy the tasty Beets!

    Beets have a unique and complex flavor profile, with the earthy taste being the most pronounced. Their sweetness increases when cooked or roasted, making them more palatable for some people.

    These root vegetables are incredibly versatile; they can be incorporated into various raw or cooked dishes. Pickled beets offer a vibrant, tangy taste that many love.

    What Goes With Beetroot Salad? Best Recipes

    August 10, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Dishes to serve with beetroot salad.

    What Goes With Beetroot Salad? If you love beet salad, a much as we do then you might be looking for some fantastic recipes to pair with beetroot salad. Whether you're looking for a side dish to enhance your Weekly Meal Plan, or seeking ideas for your next get-together, here you'll find some dishes that make great accompaniments to any beetroot salad.

    A detailed guide about what goes with beetroot salad.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Beetroot Vs Beets

    Before we begin, I wanted to answer the question are beets and beetroot the same?

    Yes, both beets and beetroot are the same vegetables. Beetroots is just another name for beets in British English. This article focuses on pairing with. beet salad - which we will refer to as beetroot salad or beet salad interchangeably - let's move on to the recipes.

    What Goes With Beetroot Salad?

    Roasted beet salad or beetroot salad is a great way to enjoy all the nutritious benefits of beets without having to sacrifice flavor. However, it can be great to eat your beet salad with a meat dish or other delicious sides.

    Whether you cook beets, roast or use raw beets in your salad, you'll definitely enjoy these tasty ideas.

    Roasted Beets Salad

    I love roasted beets and creamy goat cheese salad as well as Beetroot and feta salad with toasted walnuts and of course roasted beet salad with beet greens, feta and tomatoes.

    You can check out this roasted beet salad recipe with balsamic vinegar here! It's a delicious salad packed with flavor.

    I think beetroot salads are great when paired with grilled fish, roasted pesto chicken or steak.

    Best Side Dishes for Beetroot Salad

    The best sides to serve with beetroot salad are dishes that will complement the earthy and sweet flavors of beets. A few ideas include:

    • Roasted Potatoes
    • Sweet Potato Fries
    • Stuffed Mushrooms
    • Quinoa or other grain salads
    • Root Vegetables such as zucchini, eggplant and bell peppers - root vegetables always go great with red beets.

    My favorite meal to eat alongside a beetroot salad has to be steak. The salty and tangy flavor of the steak works perfectly with the earthiness of beetroot salad.

    Here is a popular recipe for Instant Pot Steak Bites.These steak bites pair great with beetroot salad and a side dish of asparagus.

    You might also want to try our German Potato Pancakes known as Kartoffelpuffer. They are a great dish to serve with your beetroot salad

    Recipes To Serve With Beet Salad

    Here is a list of fantastic recipes to serve with beetroot salad:

    Air Fryer Miso Glazed Salmon

    This savory and sweet miso-glazed salmon is made in the air fryer, making it a quick and easy dish to make. Serve with your favorite beetroot salad for a complete meal.

    Get the recipe for Air Fried Miso Salmon here!

    Air fryer ginger miso glazed salmon.

    Turkish Lamb Ribs

    This Turkish lamb ribs dish is juicy and full of flavor. It pairs perfectly with a fresh beet salad, making it an ideal entrée for your next dinner party.

    Grab the salad dressing and prepare to wow the family with lamb ribs and tender beets in your salad.

    Get the recipe for Turkish Lamb Ribs here!

    Turkish lamb kebabs.

    Easy Brussels Sprouts With Pinenuts

    These Instant Pot Brussels sprouts are not only delicious but also nutritious. The addition of pinenuts adds a wonderful crunch to the dish.

    Serve this side dish with your favorite beetroot salad for a complete meal.

    Get the recipe for Brussels Sprouts With Pinenuts here!

    Cooked Brussel sprouts in a bowl.

    Spinach Feta Rice Casserole

    This spinach feta rice casserole is a hearty and flavorful dish that can be served as a side or main course.

    Serve this delicious casserole alongside your favorite beet salad for variety and flavor.

    Get the recipe for Spinach Feta Rice Casserole here!

    Spinach feta rice casserole in a bowl.

    Herb Ricotta Stuffed Chicken Breast

    This herb ricotta-stuffed chicken breast is a delicious and easy meal that can be served with any type of cooked beets salad.

    Serve the stuffed chicken alongside your beetroot salad for a flavor-packed meal.

    Get the recipe for Herb Ricotta Stuffed Chicken Breast here!

    Ricotta stuffed chicken served with fresh veggies.

    Caprese Mini Pizzas

    These mini pizzas are made with a crispy crust, fresh tomatoes, and melted mozzarella cheese. The simple caprese topping is the perfect complement to any beet salad.

    Get the recipe for Caprese Mini Pizzas here!

    Caprese mini pizzas on a plate.

    Baked Rosemary Thyme Chicken

    Here is another fantastic chicken dish to serve with your roast beet salad. This Baked Rosemary Thyme Chicken is full of flavor and is sure to be a hit with the entire family.

    Get the recipe for Baked Rosemary Thyme Chicken here!

    Baked rosemary thyme chicken.

    Vegan Baked Ziti

    If you’re looking for a vegan entrée, this vegan baked ziti is sure to please. The creamy dairy-free sauce pairs perfectly with your salad greens.

    Grab the lemon juice and the olive oil and enjoy ziti with beetroot salad today.

    Get the recipe for Vegan Baked Ziti here!

    baked ziti.

    Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese

    This mac and cheese made with butternut squash is a great side dish that pairs well with beetroot salad. The sweet and creamy flavors of the squash make for an ideal side dish.

    Get the recipe for Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese here!

    Butternut squash mac and cheese.

    Pork Schnitzel

    A classic German dish, this pork schnitzel is the perfect meal to pair with your beetroot salad and Dijon mustard. Serve it up alongside a few sides and you have a complete dinner.

    Get the recipe for Pork Schnitzel here!

    Pork schnitzel served on a plate.

    Air Fryer Cauliflower Teriyaki Bites

    This air fryer cauliflower teriyaki bites dish is a great way to enjoy the flavors of teriyaki without all the fat. Serve this dish with your favorite beetroot salad for a complete meal.

    Get the recipe for Air Fryer Cauliflower Teriyaki Bites here!

    Air fried cauliflower teriyaki bites in a bowl.

    Ground Turkey Sweedish Meatballs

    If you’re looking for a protein-packed meal, these ground turkey Swedish meatballs make a delicious dinner.

    Juicy, ground turkey meatballs in a creamy sauce made with beef broth, cream, sour cream, and spices! Serve over a serving of mashed potatoes or white rice.

    Get the recipe for Ground Turkey Swedish Meatballs here!

    Ground turkey Swedish meatballs in a dish.

    Rigatoni Al Forno

    Beet Salad recipe beets pair well with rigatoni Al Forno, an Italian pasta dish made with rigatoni, bechamel sauce and mozzarella cheese.

    Riganoti al forno is a perfect blend of hearty meat sauce, gooey cheese, and large pasta tubes baked to golden perfection – all in under 60 minutes.

    Get the recipe for Rigatoni Al Forno here!

    Rigatoni Al Forno.

    Broccoli And Blue Cheese Risotto

    Grab the salt and pepper and prepare to pair this delicious rice dish with your beet salads.

    Broccoli and blue cheese risotto is quick and easy to prepare and is perfect for busy days.

    Get the recipe for Broccoli And Bue Cheese Risotto here.

    Broccoli and blue cheese risotto.

    Enjoy These Meal Suggestions With Your Next Beet Salad Today!

    Beetroot salads are a delicious way to enjoy the nutritional benefits of beets. Whether you're looking for an entrée or side dish, these recipes will ensure your next beet salad meal is one to remember. Enjoy!

    So grab a few ingredients and start cooking up some tasty pairings for your next beetroot salad. You won't regret it.

    Cooking beets and experimenting with recipes has never been more fun!

    What Is Truffle Butter?

    July 29, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Truffle butter on a wooden board.

    What Is Truffle Butter? Truffle butter is a tasty blend of creamy butter and truffles, giving your dishes a rich, earthy flavor. It's perfect for spreading on bread, mixing into pasta, or adding a special touch to meats. Let’s explore what truffle butter is and how you can use it to make your meals even better!

    Truffle Butter.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Is Truffle Butter?

    Truffle butter is a delectable compound butter infused with finely chopped or grated truffles. The butter is a carrier for the truffle's enticing flavor, resulting in a creamy, aromatic, and luxurious spread that enhances a wide range of dishes.

    What Does Truffle Butter Taste Like?

    Truffle butter has a luxurious and distinctive taste, primarily characterized by truffles' intense and earthy flavor. Combining butter and truffles creates a rich, creamy, and decadent profile.

    Truffle butter offers a deep and complex taste with notes of garlic, wild mushrooms, and earthiness. The flavor is aromatic and lingers on the palate, making it a sought-after ingredient in gourmet cuisine.

    When added to dishes, truffle butter imparts a delightful umami flavor, elevating the overall taste and creating a truly indulgent culinary experience.

    Truffle Butter Ingredients

    • Unsalted butter
    • Fresh truffles (black or white)
    • Optional: Garlic
    • Optional: Herbs (e.g., thyme, parsley, rosemary)

    How Is Truffle Butter Made?

    Truffle butter can be made by combining softened unsalted butter with grated or finely chopped truffles. The mixture is then blended until the truffles are evenly distributed throughout the butter.

    The process can be adapted to include other complementary flavors, such as garlic or herbs.

    What Is the Best Method for Making Homemade Truffle Butter?

    Trying homemade truffle butter recipe, start by allowing unsalted butter to soften at room temperature. Grate or finely chop fresh truffles and mix them thoroughly into the softened butter.

    For added complexity, consider incorporating garlic or your favorite herbs. Once combined, store the truffle compound butter in the refrigerator in an airtight container to allow the flavors to meld.

    A bowl of butter.

    Can You Freeze Truffle Butter for Later Use?

    Yes, truffle butter can be frozen to extend its shelf life. Divide it into small portions and wrap each in wax paper before you store them in an airtight container. This allows easy portioning and prevents the butter from absorbing other odors in the freezer.

    How to Store Truffle Butter?

    To store truffle butter properly, follow these steps:

    • Refrigerate: Truffle butter should be stored in the refrigerator to maintain freshness and prevent spoilage. Place the item in an airtight container or securely wrap it with plastic wrap.
    • Label and Date: If the truffle butter is homemade or without clear packaging, label the container with contents and the date of preparation to keep track of its freshness.
    • Freezing Option: If you have a large batch of truffle butter and won't use it all within a few weeks, consider freezing it for longer-term storage. Divide the butter into smaller portions and store them in airtight, freezer-safe containers or wrap them tightly in plastic wrap and aluminum foil.
    • Proper Temperature: Ensure your refrigerator maintains a consistent temperature range between 32°F to 40°F (0°C to 4°C) in order to keep the truffle butter fresh and safe to consume.
    • Shelf Life: Truffle butter can typically last for a few weeks in the refrigerator and several months in the freezer if stored properly.

    Remember to use clean utensils when scooping out the truffle butter from the container to prevent contamination, and always check for any signs of spoilage, such as an off smell or unusual texture, before consuming.

    How to Know if Truffle Butter Has Gone Bad?

    To determine if truffle butter has gone bad, look for the following signs:

    • Appearance: Check for mold, unusual discoloration, or sliminess.
    • Smell: Trust your nose; a rancid or sour odor indicates spoilage.
    • Taste: Detect any unusual or unpleasant taste.
    • Expiration Date: Refer to the packaging's expiration date for freshness.

    If you notice any of these signs, it's best to discard the truffle butter to avoid the risk of foodborne illness. Proper storage in the refrigerator and following the recommended shelf life can help maintain the freshness and quality of truffle butter.

    What Is Truffle Oil?

    Truffle oil is a flavored oil infused with the essence of truffles, a type of rare and prized fungus found underground.

    It is typically made by infusing a neutral oil, like olive oil or grapeseed oil, with small pieces of truffles or truffle extract. The result is a concentrated and aromatic oil that carries the truffles' distinct and earthy flavor.

    However, it's essential to note that not all truffle oils on the market are made with real truffles, and some may contain artificial flavorings, so it's essential to check the label for authentic truffle-infused oils.

    White vs Black Truffle Oil

    White and black truffle oil are both flavored oils infused with the essence of truffles, but they come from different types of truffles, which results in distinct taste profiles:

    White Truffle Oil

    • White truffle oil is made by infusing a neutral oil with the essence of white truffles (Tuber magnatum), which are highly prized and considered more aromatic than black truffles.
    • It has a delicate and intense flavor with a garlicky, musky, and slightly sweet taste.
    • White truffle oil is commonly used as a finishing oil to give a luxurious touch to dishes like Shrimp Scampi, Risotto, and avocado salad.
    Truffle oil.

    Black Truffle Oil

    • Black truffle oil is made by infusing a neutral oil with the essence of black truffles (Tuber melanosporum), which have a more robust and earthy flavor than white truffles.
    • It has a stronger and more pungent taste with earthy and mushroom-like notes.
    • Black truffle oil is also consumed as a finishing oil, commonly drizzled over dishes like pasta, grilled meats, and omelets.
    Truffle oil in bowl.

    While both oils provide truffles' distinct and luxurious taste, the choice between white and black truffle oil largely depends on personal preference and the specific dishes they are paired with.

    Can Truffle Oil Be Used to Make Truffle Butter?

    Yes, truffle oil can be used to make truffle butter, but it is essential to use a high-quality oil with real truffle essence rather than synthetic flavorings. Mix the truffle oil with softened butter to create a more accessible and budget-friendly version of truffle butter.

    What Are Some Creative Recipes Using Truffle Butter?

    From truffle butter sauce for pasta to truffle-infused mashed potatoes, there are countless ways to explore the culinary potential of this luxurious ingredient. Let's dive into some mouthwatering recipes that incorporate truffle butter:

    • Truffle Butter Popcorn: Drizzle melted truffle butter over freshly popped Popcorn for a gourmet movie night treat.
    • Truffle Butter Grilled Cheese: Spread truffle butter on bread slices before grilling with cheese for an elevated twist on classic grilled cheese.
    • Truffle Butter Mashed Potatoes: Mix truffle butter into creamy Mashed Potatoes for a decadent and flavorful side dish.
    • Truffle Butter Scrambled Eggs: Whisk truffle butter into Scrambled Eggs for a luxurious and savory breakfast.

    Make Truffle Sauce at Home

    To make truffle sauce at home, start by melting truffle butter in a saucepan over low heat. Once melted, whisk in some heavy cream and a pinch of salt until well combined.

    For added depth of flavor, you can also stir in some grated Parmesan cheese. Let the sauce simmer gently for a few minutes until it thickens slightly. Taste and adjust the seasoning as needed.

    Drizzle this luscious truffle sauce over your favorite dishes, such as pasta, grilled meats, or vegetables, for a luxurious and unforgettable culinary experience.

    Enjoy Tasty Truffle Butter

    Truffle butter stands as a true delicacy, capturing the essence of these elusive fungi in a creamy and luxurious spread. Truffle butter can transform ordinary dishes into extraordinary culinary delights with its earthy flavor and tantalizing aroma.

    Whether homemade or store-bought, incorporating truffle butter into your culinary creations is sure to elevate your dining experience to new heights. So, indulge in the allure of truffle butter and savor the rich flavors of this exquisite gourmet treat.

    Baked With Love Valentine Cookies

    July 16, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Valentine cookies ready to be served.

    These Baked with Love Valentine Cookies are the perfect sweet treat to whip up for your special someone this Valentine's Day. You'll find a ton of Valentines inspired sugar cookies to choose from, but these are special, simply because they bring in the best of three delicious and unique flavors.

    Baked Valentine cookies.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Versatile: The best part about these sugar cookies, in my opinion, is that they go beyond the classic flavor base of most Valentine cookies.
    • Tasty: They taste great, and aren't anything like those simple heart-shaped Valentine's Day cookie recipes that you'll find yourself baking.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    These Valentines Day cookies have lots of tasty ingredients. Here are some of our favorites.

    • Light Brown Sugar: Light brown sugar, with its molasses notes, adds depth of sweetness and moisture to the dough, resulting in a chewier and richer texture.
    • Semi-Sweet Chocolate Chips: Semi-sweet chocolate chips create gooey, melty pockets of chocolate, offering a delightful contrast to the cookie base.
    • Red Gel Food Coloring: Red gel food coloring adds a vibrant red hue, enhancing the visual appeal.
    • Strawberry Jello Mix: Strawberry Jello mix infuses the dough with a fruity and vibrant strawberry flavor, adding a unique twist.
    • White Chocolate Instant Pudding Mix: White chocolate instant pudding mix contributes a creamy texture and enhances the richness of the cookies.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    How to Make Valentine's Cookies

    1. Step 1: Preheat oven to 350 degrees and line a cookie sheet with metal baking rings, a baking sheet, or some parchment paper.
    1. Step 2: Using a large mixing bowl and hand beaters, cream together the butter, sugar, and brown sugar until light in color and fluffy. Beat in the eggs, one at a time, followed by mixing in the vanilla and red gel food coloring.
    1. Step 3: Using a medium bowl, whisk together the cocoa powder, flour, baking soda, and salt. Gradually mix the dry ingredients into the wet until combined. Gently fold in the chocolate chips and half of the Valentine's Day sprinkles. Set aside.
    Pink batter for cookies.
    1. Step 4: Use a large mixing bowl, and cream together the butter, sugar, and Jello mix. Beat in the eggs and vanilla until combined. Using a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, pudding mix, baking soda, and salt. Gradually mix in the dry ingredients into the wet. Fold in the white chocolate chips. Set aside.
    Cookie dough in a bowl.
    1. Step 5: Use another large bowl and a hand mixer to beat together the butter, brown sugar, and sugar until pale in color and fluffy. Beat in the egg and vanilla until combined. Using a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking soda, and salt. Gradually beat into the wet ingredients until a dough forms/folds in the chocolate chips.
    Valentine cookies dough on tray.
    1. Step 6: Using a small cookie scoop and baking scale, weigh some dough balls to about 1.5 oz. You want to make sure to have 3 dough balls in total, 1 for each recipe. Once you have pressed the pre-made dough balls, carefully mash the 3 flavors and gently press the sugar cookie dough into a thick disk.
    Heart shaped dough to make cookies.
    1. Step 7: Press in the chocolate chips and the love heart chocolate. Bake in the oven for 13-15 minutes. Allow the Valentine cookies to cool for a few minutes on a cooling rack. Enjoy!
    Valentine cookies.

    Tips For Making These Valentines Cookies

    While you may be sorted on the cookie recipe, you might want to take note of these tips and tricks before you go ahead and bake.

    • We've topped the sugar cookies with chocolate hearts, but if you want, you can also use chocolate kisses as a topping.
    • In fact, you can try out a ton of different ways of decorating these Valentines Day cookies. You can top the cooled-down cookies with some royal icing and then top it with some cute pink candies of your choice.
    • Another great idea is to spread some melted chocolate or royal icing between two individual cookies and turn them into sandwich cookies.
    • You can also use a heart-shaped cookie cutter to turn this triple dough into heart-shaped sugar cookies, perfect for Valentine's Day.
    • These Valentine's Day cookies can be enjoyed on their own as a snack or can be served for dessert too!

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • To bring a bit of flavor variation in the three different sections of the sugar cookies, you can swap the vanilla extract with some almond extract instead.
    • Another great idea is to try out different flavors of Valentine cookies using different mix-ins. For instance, you can add orange zest into one of the dough portions, peanut butter into one portion, and some coconut flakes into one.
    • A mix of chocolate chip cookies, red velvet cookies, and some classic sugar cookies can also be a great idea to try this Valentine's Day.
    Valentines cookies on a table.

    🔪 How To Store These Valentines Day Cookies

    • Fridge: These easy Valentine cookies can be made in a batch and refrigerated or stored over the countertop if you haven't coated them in royal icing yet.
    • Wax Paper: You can wrap them up in some parchment paper, wax paper, or plastic wrap before you transfer them to an airtight container. Doing this will help keep these Valentine cookies fresh and taste perfect when you eat them later too!

    🍽 More Cookies To Try

    • Chocolate peanut butter cookies on a tray.
      Chocolate Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Best Brown Butter Cookies Recipe.
      Best Brown Butter Cookies Recipe
    • Crispy Peanut Butter Cookies.
      Crispy Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Chewy Chocolate Peppermint Cookies.
      Chewy Chocolate Peppermint Cookies

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Valentine cookies ready to be served.

    Baked With Love Valentines Cookies

    Angela Milnes
    Celebrate Valentine’s Day with Baked With Love Valentine’s Cookies! These heart-shaped treats feature vibrant, three-colored dough, creating a beautiful, eye-catching and tasty treat.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Additional Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Desserts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Servings
    Calories 3463 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    For Red Cookie Dough

    • 1 ½ Cup Unsalted Sweet Cream Butter softened
    • 2 Cup Sugar you can also use powdered sugar
    • ⅔ Cup Light Brown Sugar
    • 4 Eggs
    • 2 teaspoon Pure Vanilla Extract
    • 1 Cup Dark Hershey’s Cocoa Powder
    • 2 Cup Flour
    • 1 teaspoon Baking Soda
    • ½ teaspoon Kosher Salt
    • 1 Cup Semi Sweet Chocolate Chips
    • 1 ½ Cup Mini Heart Shaped Confetti Sprinkles
    • 4 tablespoon Red Gel Food Coloring

    Strawberry Chocolate Batter

    • 1 Cup Unsalted Sweet Cream Butter softened
    • 1 Cup Sugar
    • 2 tablespoon Strawberry Jello Mix
    • 2 Eggs
    • 1 teaspoon Pure Vanilla Extract
    • 2 ½ Cup Flour
    • 3.4 ounce White Chocolate Instant Pudding Mix
    • 1 teaspoon Baking Soda
    • ½ teaspoon Kosher Salt
    • 8 ounce White Chocolate Chips

    For Chocolate Chip Cookie Dough

    • 1 Cup Unsalted Sweet Cream Butter softened
    • 1 ½ Cup Light Brown Sugar
    • ½ Cup Sugar
    • 2 Egg
    • 2 teaspoon Pure Vanilla Extract
    • 2 ½ Cup Flour
    • 1 teaspoon Baking Soda
    • 1 teaspoon Kosher Salt
    • 2 ¾ Cup Semi Sweet Chocolate Chips

    Decoration

    • 6 foil chocolate hearts

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees and line a cookie sheet with metal baking rings, a baking sheet or some parchment paper.

    For The Red Cookie Dough

    • Using a large mixing bowl and hand beaters, cream together the butter, sugar, and brown sugar until light in color and fluffy. Beat in the eggs, one at a time, followed by mixing in the vanilla and red gel food coloring.
    • Using a medium bowl, whisk together the cocoa powder, flour, baking soda, and salt. Gradually mix in the dry ingredients into the wet until combined.
    • Gently fold in the chocolate chips and half of the valentines day sprinkles. Set aside.

    For Strawberry Chocolate Batter:

    • Use a large mixing bowl, and cream together the butter, sugar and Jello mix. Beat in the eggs and vanilla until combined.
    • Using a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, pudding mix, baking soda and salt. Gradually mix in the dry ingredients into the wet. Fold in the white chocolate chips. Set aside 

    For Chocolate Chip Cookie Dough

    • Use another large bowl and hand mixer, beat together the butter, brown sugar, and sugar until pale in color and fluffy 
    • Beat in the egg and vanilla until combined. Using a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking soda, and salt.
    • Gradually beat into the wet ingredients until a dough forms/ fold in the chocolate chips

    Construction Your Cookies

    • Using a small cookie scoop and baking scale, weight some dough balls to about 1.5 oz. You want to make sure to have 3 dough balls in total, 1 for each recipe 
    • Once you have pressed the pre-made dough balls, carefully mash the 3 flavors and gently press the sugar cookie dough into a thick disk. Press in the chocolate chips and love heart chocolate.
    • Bake in the oven for 13-15 minutes. Allow the Valentine cookies to cool for a few minutes on a cooling rack. Enjoy!

    Notes

    We've topped the sugar cookies with chocolate hearts, but if you want, you can also use chocolate kisses as a topping.
    You can try out a ton of different ways of decorating these Valentines day cookies. You can top the cooled down cookies with some royal icing and then top it with some cute pink candies of your choices.
    Another great idea is to spread some melted chocolate or royal icing between two individual cookies and turn it into sandwich cookies.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 3463kcalCarbohydrates: 451gProtein: 36gFat: 175gSaturated Fat: 106gPolyunsaturated Fat: 8gMonounsaturated Fat: 47gTrans Fat: 4gCholesterol: 519mgSodium: 2132mgPotassium: 1346mgFiber: 18gSugar: 299gVitamin A: 3693IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 327mgIron: 18mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Cookie Recipes

    If you enjoyed trying out these delicious Valentine's day cookies, and are inspired to try some more such recipes, here are a few good ones to try out.

    • Whopper Mini Egg Cookies
    • Red Velvet Cookies
    • Healthy Banana Oatmeal Cookies
    • Crispy Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Valentine’s Day Heart Cookies
    Valentine cookies with little chocolate heart on them.

    What Color Is Beetroot?

    July 14, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Different colored beetroots.

    Do you know what color is beetroot? No worries if you don't – it turns out there's a little more to this vegetable than meets the eye. Beetroot may be recognizable for its vibrant purple or red hue, but did you know that it can also come in shades of white, golden yellow, and even pink?

    It's time to give this often-overlooked veggie some respect! In this article, we'll explore different colors of beetroots and share delicious recipes featuring them. Enjoy your journey through the world of colorful beets!

    What Color Is Beetroot
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why Is It Necessary To Know About The Colors Of Beets?

    Beets come in a variety of hues - the most common being deep purple-red, but they are also available in golden yellow, white, and even striped varieties like the Chioggia beet.

    Each color variant has a distinct flavor profile, which can significantly impact your culinary creations. 

    What Color Is Beetroot?

    Beetroot, scientifically known as Beta Vulgaris, is recognized for its distinctive color palette that predominantly showcases shades of red and dark red color. The color can vary due to different degrees of zoning noticeable in slices.

    Interestingly, beetroot is not just about the edible taproots; the leaves, often called beet greens, also hold significant culinary value. Some varieties of this table beet even offer a mix of colors such as white, red with white rings, and yellow with light rings.

    However, the classic red beet, bordering on fuchsia, remains the most common image that comes to mind when one thinks of beetroot.

    Why Beetroot Is Red?

    Isn't nature fascinating? Take the red beet, for instance. This humble root vegetable is a visual delight with its vibrant beet-red color. But have you ever wondered how it gets that distinct hue?

    It's all thanks to betalains, a group of pigments that are responsible for the red and yellow colors seen in several fruits, vegetables, and flowers. In beetroots, the red color comes from a type of betalain called betacyanins.

    What Do Beetroots Look Like?

    Beetroots are a vibrant, deep maroon color known for their distinctive sweet flavor. They typically have an oval or oblong shape with smooth, reddish-purple skin. Once you cut into them, you'll find the same rich color throughout their flesh.

    Colors Of Different Types Of Beets

    Beets, also known as beetroot, are vibrant and versatile vegetables that come in a variety of colors and types. Here's a glimpse into the color palette of several cultivated varieties of beetroot:

    Red Beets

    The most common type of beet they have a deep ruby-red color. Varieties include 'Detroit Dark Red', 'Crapaudine', and 'Crosby Egyptian'. They are known for their rich, earthy flavor.

    What Color Is Beetroot - Red Beets

    Orange Beets

    These beets have deep orange skin and bright yellow flesh. They retain their color when cooked, which makes them a visually appealing addition to dishes.

    Chioggia Beets

    Also known as candy cane or striped beets, Chioggia beets have a unique pink and white striped interior. Their exterior is generally red and named after the Italian town of Chioggia.

    What Color Is Beetroot - Chioggia Beets

    Purple Beets

    While all beets can appear purple-ish, some specific varieties like 'Purple Viking' have especially dark, almost black-purple skins and deep red flesh.

    What Color Is Beetroot - Purple Beets

    Golden Beets

    As the name suggests, golden beet displays a vibrant yellow-gold color. This variety has a slightly sweeter flavor compared to red beets and doesn't stain as much.

    What Color Is Beetroot - Golden Beets

    Yellow Beets

    Yellow beets have a light yellow flesh and a less earthy and sweeter taste than red beets.

    White Beets

    White beets, also known as albino or sugar beets, are a variety of beets with creamy white flesh and nearly white skin. They are famously known for being used in commercial sugar production due to their high sugar content, making them the sweetest of all beet varieties.

    Unlike their red or golden counterparts, white beets have a milder, slightly sweeter taste and a more delicate texture.

    What Color Is Beetroot - White Beets

    What Color Is Beetroot Leaves?

    Beetroot leaves are typically dark green with characteristic red veining. The stems are often thin and burgundy-colored. However, changes in soil conditions, such as lack of phosphorus, can cause the leaves to turn red or purple.

    Can Beets Change The Color Of Your Urine?

    Consuming beets or foods colored with beetroot can indeed change the color of your urine. This phenomenon, known as "beeturia," is characterized by passing red or pink urine after beet consumption.

    The color change is due to a compound in beets called betanin, which gives the vegetable its bright red pigment.

    Can You Make Natural Red Food Coloring Using Red Beet?

    Yes, you can make natural red food coloring using red beet. The beauty of using beet root as a natural food coloring is very visually appealing. Below are the steps you can follow to extract your natural food color:

    1. Selection: Start by choosing a beet that is firm and smooth. Larger beets are often more fibrous and less flavorful, so medium or small-sized beets are usually the best choice.
    2. Cleaning: Scrub the beet under cold running water to remove any dirt or grime. Do not peel the beet yet, as the skin helps to keep the color intact during cooking.
    3. Cooking: The simplest way to extract the color is by boiling the beet. Cut the beet into quarters and place it in a pot of water. Bring the water to a boil; after that, reduce the heat and let it simmer until the beet pieces are tender. This could take anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour, depending on the size of the beet pieces.
    4. Extraction: After the beet is cooked, the colored water is your natural food dye. You can strain out the beet pieces and let the liquid cool. Now, you have beautiful, vibrant, natural red food coloring!

    You can use this natural red food coloring in a variety of culinary creations, from frosting and cakes to pasta and drinks. Just remember that beet juice does have its own mild flavor, so it's best used in recipes where it will complement the other ingredients.

    Delicious Beetroot Recipes To Try

    Beetroots are not only vibrant and beautiful, but they're also packed with essential nutrients. So, here are three scrumptious beetroot recipes that you absolutely must try!

    1. Citrus And Honey Roasted Beets: This unique beetroot recipe is a flavor bomb! The citrus and honey perfectly balance the earthy taste of the beets. The recipe is simple to follow, making it an excellent dish for both weekday dinners and special occasions.
    2. Instant Pot Beetroot Soup: This is a quick and easy beetroot soup made in an Instant Pot. It's hearty and perfect for those chilly nights. Thanks to the Instant Pot, the recipe is time-efficient, and the soup tastes absolutely delicious.
    3. Vegetable Puree With Beetroot: This recipe is a great way to incorporate more vegetables into your diet. The puree is smooth, flavorful, and beautiful, thanks to the beetroots. It's a versatile dish that is served as a side or used as a base for other dishes.

    Wrapping Up

    In conclusion, beetroot comes in a variety of colors, including red, orange, yellow, golden, purple, and white. The color of the beet is determined by its specific variety and can range from deep maroon to bright yellow.

    Beet leaves are typically dark green with red veining. Additionally, beets can be used as a natural food coloring agent to give dishes a vibrant red color without the use of artificial dyes.

    Overall, no matter what color they may come in, beetroots are not only visually appealing but also nutritious and versatile.

    Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw?

    July 13, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Shredded beetroots.

    Wondering if you can enjoy beetroot in its natural state? Eating raw beetroot is not only possible but also comes with a host of health benefits. Packed with nutrients, this vibrant vegetable is a great addition to your diet.

    Discover why raw beetroot and other raw vegetables should be part of your healthy eating routine. Dive in to learn more about the question "Can beetroot be eaten raw?"

    Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw?

    Absolutely, beetroot can be eaten raw. When you eat raw beets, you get the full spectrum of their health benefits, which include being rich in dietary nitrates that can boost your workouts.

    Can You Eat Beetroot Raw In Salad?

    Yes, you can absolutely eat beetroot raw in a salad. Raw beets are not only edible but also highly nutritious. They can add a crunchy texture and vibrant color to your salads.

    For the best experience, it's recommended to shred or spiralize them due to their dense, fibrous nature. Some people even enjoy pairing raw beets with sweet components like apples and carrots.

    Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw - Beetroot Salad

    Can You Eat Raw Beet Greens?

    Yes, you can definitely eat raw beet greens. When the leaves and stems emerge, and the leaves are still small (about 2 inches long), you can trim and eat them raw in salads. They're delicate and soft, making them a great addition to your meals.

    Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw - Beet Greens

    Can You Eat Raw Beetroot Skin?

    Yes, it's safe to eat raw beetroot skin. However, some people might find the taste of raw beetroot skin to be too earthy or bitter, and its texture may be hard.

    It's always a good idea to thoroughly wash the beetroot before consuming it, especially if you plan to eat the skin, to remove any dirt or pesticides.

    Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw - Beetroot Skin

    Can You Drink Raw Beet Juice?

    Yes! Raw beets, including their leaves and stems, can be juiced to create a delicious beverage known as beet juice or beetroot juice.

    Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw - Beetroot Juice

    Are Canned Beets Good For You?

    Canned beets are surely a healthy addition to your diet. They maintain almost the same nutritional value as their fresh counterparts, providing key nutrients like folate, potassium, and iron.

    While they are slightly higher in sodium, the convenience factor can't be ignored. Already cooked and ready to use, canned beets save you time and effort in preparation.

    Are Canned Beets Good For You

    Are Pickled Beets Good For You?

    Yes, pickled beets can indeed be good for you. Pickled beets contain probiotics like that support gut health and digestion.

    They also increase levels of glutathione in the body, an antioxidant that plays a significant role in supporting a healthy immune system.

    Are Pickled Beets Good For You

    Is Beet Root Powder Good For You?

    Beetroot powder, derived from raw beetroots, has become increasingly popular in recent years. Many people add vibrant powder to smoothies, juice, and even baked goods as a way to boost their intake of vitamins and minerals.

    Beetroot powder supports healthy digestion, improves brain function, and enhances athletic performance. Incorporating this colorful superfood into your diet is a delicious way to promote overall well-being.

    Is Beet Root Powder Good For You

    What Do Raw Beets Taste Like?

    If you've never tried raw beets before, get ready for a sweet and earthy flavor that is uniquely delicious. Raw beets have a slightly crunchy texture that gives way to a sweet, juicy center.

    Raw Beets Vs. Cooked Beets

    Beets are a beloved root vegetable packed with essential nutrients. While some people enjoy eating raw beets, others prefer them cooked. There are certainly some differences between the two:

    Nutritional Value

    • Raw Beets: Eating raw beets provides the highest nutritional value.
    • Cooked Beets: Cooking beets reduces some of their nutritional content.

    Taste

    • Raw Beets: Raw beets are crunchy and slightly bitter.
    • Cooked Beets: The sweetness of cooked beets arises from the breakdown of cell walls during cooking, lending them a delightful flavor profile.

    Texture

    • Raw Beets: Eating raw beets can provide a crunchy, firm texture.
    • Cooked Beets: Cooked beets can become soft, tender, and mushy.

    Serving Suggestion

    • Raw Beets: Raw beets are best served grated or shaved over salads for added crunch.
    • Cooked Beets: Cooked beets can be cooked in a variety of ways, including soup, boiled, steamed, pickled, and roasted beets. Learn how to make Instant Pot Beetroot Soup .

    5 Best Ways To Eat Beets Raw

    Eating raw beets can be a great addition to your diet. Here are some popular ways to enjoy them:

    1. Add To Smoothies: Raw beets can be added to smoothies for a naturally sweet kick. They also lend a beautiful color to your blend.
    2. In Salads: Thinly sliced raw beets make a great addition to salads. They add a refreshing crunch, and their unique, earthy taste can complement a variety of other salad ingredients.
    3. As A Snack: Thinly sliced beets can be enjoyed as a snack on their own. You can also try spiralizing them and including them in bowls or noodle dishes for a vibrant, healthful twist.
    4. Juice Them: Raw beetroot juice is another way to consume this vegetable. It's a concentrated source of nutrients and can be mixed with other fruit juices for flavor.
    5. Grated Into Dishes: Fresh, raw beets can be finely grated into salads for color or used as a garnish for soups. They can also add vibrant color and extra crunch to sandwiches or grain bowls.

    How Often Can You Eat Raw Beetroot?

    Like any food, variety is important. Therefore, even though beetroot is healthy, it's not recommended to eat it in more quantity every single day.

    It's also worth noting that beets are high in the compound oxalate, so eating too many can contribute to kidney stone formation. To prevent this, limiting your daily intake of beets to a single serving of half a cup is recommended.

    Who Should Not Eat Raw Beetroot?

    Certain individuals should avoid eating raw beetroot due to its high oxalate content and potential impact on blood pressure. These include:

    1. People With Kidney Disease Or A History Of Kidney Stones: Beetroot is high in oxalates, which can cause the formation of kidney stones. If you've had kidney stones in the past, it might be best to avoid beets or only consume them occasionally.
    2. Individuals With Gout: The oxalates in beetroot can also exacerbate symptoms in people with gout.
    3. Those With Low Blood Pressure: Beetroot has been shown to lower blood pressure. While this can be beneficial for people with high blood pressure, it could potentially cause problems for those who already have low blood pressure.

    So, Can Beetroot Be Eaten Raw?

    In conclusion, raw beetroot can be eaten, and it is full of essential vitamins and minerals that benefit overall health.

    Eating raw beets in moderation can be a healthy addition to your diet, but it's important to keep in mind that certain individuals should avoid them due to their potential impact on blood pressure and oxalate levels.

    What is Beetroot? Different Types Of Beetroot

    July 8, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Fresh raw beets.

    Are you looking for simple and nutritious food to add to your diet? If so, look no further than the mighty beetroot! Beetroot is an ancient root vegetable that's been around for centuries. Not only is it enjoyed in a variety of delicious dishes, but it also offers incredible taste.

    In this blog post, we'll deep dive into everything there is to know about the super versatile beetroot – from its nutritional properties to fun recipes that include it. So, let's get started by exploring the basics: What is beetroot exactly?

    What is Beetroot
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Is Beetroot?

    Beetroot, also known as Beta vulgaris or table beet in the scientific community, is a root vegetable known for its deep, purple-red hue. This plant Belongs ToTthe Chenopodiaceae Family.

    Beetroots come in a variety of types, including red, gold, and striped, each offering a unique flavor profile. This vegetable is more than just a colorful addition to meals; it's brimming with a wealth of nutrients.

    Where Did Beetroot Originate?

    The origin of beetroot traces back to the ancient Mediterranean region. It was first cultivated by the Romans and Greeks, who initially used the leaves before recognizing the value of the root.

    Over time, beetroot spread to other parts of Europe, Asia, and the Americas. Today, it is grown in various parts of the world due to its adaptability to different climates and soil types.

    Is Beet The Same As Beetroot?

    Yes, the terms "beet" and "beetroot" are used interchangeably and refer to the same vegetable. While it's commonly called "beet" in the U.S., in many other parts of the world, including the U.K., it's referred to as "beetroot".

    What Does A Beetroot Look Like?

    Beetroot is a root vegetable that is round or oval in shape. It's typically a rich, dark red or purple color, though there are varieties that can be golden or white. It has fairly tough and smooth skin, while the inside is firm and crunchy when raw, becoming softer when cooked.

    The beetroot is attached to green leaves and stems, which are also edible and similar in taste to spinach.

    What Does Beetroot Taste Like?

    Beetroot has a unique taste that is often described as sweet and earthy. Thanks to its High Sugar Content, the sweetness is quite pronounced, which is why it's sometimes used in desserts. However, beetroot's sweet flavor is balanced by an underlying earthiness, giving it a complex profile.

    Some people also detect a slight bitterness, particularly in the skin. When cooked, beetroot becomes softer and its sweetness more subtle, but the characteristic earthy flavor remains.

    Types Of Beets

    Did you know there are many specialty beet varieties with unique flavor profiles and characteristics? Here are some common types of beetroots:

    1. Sugar Beets

    Sugar beet, a specialized type of beet, is distinctively known for its High Sucrose Content. Unlike the typical deep-colored beetroot, sugar beets are white and have an appearance akin to turnips.

    Primarily cultivated for commercial sugar production, sugar beets have carved out their own niche in the beet family. While they still possess some of the earthy sweetness associated with beetroot, their flavor is less intense, often described as subtly sweet with a slightly fibrous texture.

    What is Beetroot

    Cylindra Beet

    The Cylindra beet, often referred to as the Formanova beet, is an heirloom variety notable for its unique elongated shape, akin to a butter slicer. Its cylindrical form lends itself to easy slicing and peeling, making it a popular choice in the kitchen.

    It boasts an earthy and sweet flavor that softens upon cooking, enveloped by a smooth, dark maroon skin. The Cylindra beet's deep red flesh and fine-grained texture further enhance its culinary appeal.

    What is Beetroot

    3. Baby Beets

    As the name suggests, baby beets are young beetroot harvested early for their small size and tender texture. These delicious roots usually have a round shape, and their size can vary from that of a cherry to a golf ball.

    The flavor of baby beets is notably sweeter and less earthy than mature beets, making them a favorite in various dishes. Their leaves, known as baby greens, are also edible and are often used in salads for their fresh and slightly bitter taste.

    What is Beetroot

    4. Detroit Dark Red Beets

    This type of beet is an heirloom variety known for its deep red roots that are as delicious as they are vibrant. The round shape of these beauties, about 3" in diameter, makes them perfect for various recipes.

    From their bright red stems to their dark green leaves, every part of the Detroit dark red beet is a celebration of color and flavor. The baby greens offer a delightful crunch, while the delicious roots bring a unique sweetness to any dish.

    What is Beetroot

    5. Golden Beets

    Golden beet is a delightful variety of beet that stands out for its radiant, golden-yellow hue. Unlike the stronger earthy taste of most beet varieties, golden beets offer a mild flavor, making them a popular choice for those who appreciate a subtler, less earthy taste in their root vegetables.

    Their shape ranges from round to slightly oblong, covered in a smooth skin that reveals the bright yellow flesh inside when cut open. As a herbaceous vegetable, golden beets are found in gardens and farmers' markets around the world, loved for their sweet taste and the colorful touch they add to dishes.

    What is Beetroot

    6. Deep Red Beets

    Deep red beets are renowned for their rich, sweet flavor and smooth, round roots. These beets have a distinctive deep crimson color, adding a vibrant touch to any dish.

    They're not just about the root; the green tops are edible and equally delicious, often used in salads or as a cooked side dish. This type of beetroot is a favorite among gardeners and farmers around the globe due to its adaptability to various climates and its high yield.

    What is Beetroot

    7. White Beets

    White beets, particularly the Albino and Detroit White varieties, are unique beetroot types known for their hearty flavor and distinct round shape. These beets feature solid white roots that add a touch of uniqueness to any dish without the typical staining or bleeding of red beets.

    White beets' flavor profile is sweet and hearty, offering a mild taste that's less earthy than other beet varieties. The green tops of white beets are also edible, making them a a great addition to salads or cooked dishes.

    What is Beetroot

    8. Chioggia Beets

    Chioggia beets, an heirloom variety from Italy, are an exciting addition to any garden or kitchen. They're known for their unique candy-stripe pattern of deep pink and white spirals, contained within a pale red skin when sliced.

    The globular to oval shape of these beets adds to their appeal. As for the flavor, Chioggia beets offer a sweet taste that's less earthy than other beetroot types. The green leaves connected to these beets are thick and crisp, making them a nutritious addition to salads.

    What is Beetroot

    Is Beetroot Low Fodmap?

    Beetroot contains two fermentable short-chain carbohydrates: oligosaccharides and monosaccharides in the form of fructose. Because of this, it is considered a high FODMAP food when consumed in larger quantities.

    However, according to testing done by Monash University, a respected institution in the field of FODMAP research, a low FODMAP serving size of fresh beetroot is 25 grams, which is equivalent to about two thin slices per meal.

    This means that while beetroot is not inherently low in FODMAPs, it can be included in a low FODMAP diet if consumption is limited to smaller portions.

    eating Raw Beetroot

    Absolutely, you can eat beetroot raw! Fresh beets are a crunchy treat that can bring both color and flavor to your meals. The earthy sweetness of raw beets can add a unique twist to your summer salads.

    And did you know? Not only the beetroot but even the beetgreens can be eaten raw. These leafy dark green tops are often overlooked, but they're packed with nutrients and can be a great addition to your meals.

    Health Benefits Of Beetroot

    Here are some health benefits of beetroot:

    Blood Pressure Reduction

    Beetroots contain a high concentration of nitrates, which can help lower your blood pressure levels.

    Heart Health

    Beets are rich in potassium, which helps create more flexible blood vessels, leading to lower blood pressure. This, in turn, provides multiple benefits for cardiovascular and heart health.

    Cleanses Liver

    Beetroot is a powerhouse for liver health, offering potent detoxifying properties. Rich in antioxidants like betaine, it helps reduce inflammation and supports bile production.

    Beetroot's high antioxidant betaine aids in liver regeneration. Consuming beetroot regularly can promote overall liver function and health.

    Can Women Eat Beetroot In Pregnancy?

    Yes, women can indeed consume beetroot during pregnancy. Beetroots are a highly recommended food for pregnant women's health due to their high vitamin and mineral content.

    Enjoy Beetroot In Your Diet

    Beetroot is a highly nutritious and versatile vegetable that can be used in many delicious recipes. Whether you're looking for a colorful addition to your salads or want to take advantage of its health benefits with some hearty soup, there are plenty of ways to enjoy it!

    Super Cute Animal Sprinkle Circus Cookies

    June 28, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Animal sprinkle circus cookies.

    These Animal Sprinkle Circus Cookies are the perfect adaptation of the classic, Levain bakery-style cookies, topped with the iconic Mother's original circus animal cookies..

    Animal sprinkle circus cookies.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Tasty: The deliciousness of these animal sprinkle circus cookies just blows my mind- it is unlike anything you've ever tasted, I promise you that!
    • Iconic Shapes: Another plus is the fact that these animal sprinkle cookies can be cut into different animal shapes or any other iconic shapes, which makes them great for kids!
    • Easy Prep: What's more, the prep time is absolutely minimal, which is perfect for me.
    Cute sprinkle circus cookies.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Ingredients need to make sprinkle circus cookies.
    • Sweet Cream Unsalted Butter, Cold, Cut into Cubes: Adds a rich, creamy flavor to the cookies and aids in their texture and structure.
    • Sugar: Helps the cookies spread during baking and provides a sweet base that balances the other flavors.
    • Large Eggs: Act as a binding agent, holding all the ingredients together, and also add moisture to the dough.
    • Pure Vanilla Extract: Enhances the flavors of the cookies and contributes a warm, comforting note to the overall taste.
    • Pure Almond Extract: Adds a subtle nutty flavor to the cookies, complementing their sweetness and making them even more delicious.
    • Cornstarch: Is used to make the cookies softer and more tender by breaking down some of the protein in the flour.
    • Baking Soda: Is a leavening agent that helps the cookies rise and become light and airy.
    • Salt: Enhances the sweet and creamy flavors, highlighting the complexities within the cookies.
    • Cake Flour: Has less protein than wheat flour (not enriched flour) or all-purpose flour, resulting in a lighter, more tender cookie.
    • All Purpose Flour: Provides structure and body to the cookies, ensuring they hold their shape.
    • Chopped Frosted Original Circus Animal Cookies: Add a fun and nostalgic twist to the recipe, infusing the dough with extra sweetness and a playful crunch.
    • White Chocolate Chips: Add a sweet, creamy flavor and a satisfying texture contrast when bitten into.
    • Rainbow Jimmies Sprinkles: Add a burst of color, a bit of crunch, and an extra touch of sweetness, making these cookies visually appealing and even more tasty.
    • Muffin Baking Rings: Used to shape cookies for consistent size and shape, perfect for parties or gifting.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    Hydrogenated Palm Kernel Oil: Can be used as a substitute for unsalted sweet cream butter in your circus cookies recipe. This oil will help to keep the cookies moist and tender, providing a similar texture while also offering a stable fat that aids in the structure of the cookies.

    🔪 How To Make Sprinkle Circus Cookies

    Butter and sugar in a bowl.
    1. Step 1: Using a standing mixer, cream together the butter and sugar in a medium bowl until light and fluffy.
    Adding eggs to cookie dough.
    1. Step 2: Beat in the eggs one at a time. Beat in the vanilla until combined. Use a large bowl to whisk together the flour, cornstarch, baking soda, and other ingredients. Gradually whisk in the dry ingredients into the wet until combined and smooth
    Sprinkles and chocolate chips in mixer bowl.
    1. Step 3: Fold in the chopped frosted original circus animal cookies, white chocolate chips, and sprinkles. Using a medium cookie scoop and kitchen scale, scoop some cookie dough out and weigh the dough to 5.5 oz. Place 6-7 muffin baking rings onto the cookie sheets with lightly floured surface.
    Animal sprinkle circus cookies on a sheet.
    1. Step 4: Roll the dough into a ball and place the dough ball into a baking ring. Gently press the dough ball into a thick disk in the ring. Bake in the oven for 12-14 minutes or until lightly golden around the sides. The center will still be gooey, and that's okay because it's the best part! Let the circus animal cookies cool for 10 minutes before enjoying them!

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • Chill the Dough: Putting the dough in the fridge for a bit makes it easier to handle and helps keep the cookies from spreading too much.
    • Roll in Extra Sprinkles: Before baking, roll your cookie dough balls in extra sprinkles for a super colorful treat.
    • Try Different Cookie Cutters: Use mini animal cookie cutters for an extra fun twist of animal shapes on your circus-themed treats!

    💭 FAQs

    How Do I Decorate the White Circus Animal Cookies?

    The best way to decorate these circus cookies is to top them with some frosting and then top them with some extra sprinkles and original circus animal cookies.

    Love sticking to the classic pink and white combination, or just simple white frosting or white icing on each cookie, then topped with the circus animals.

    If you're not too sure about either of these, you can just stick to using a bit of confectioner's glaze, and then top the cookies with some original circus animal cookies.

    Best Way To Store Sprinkle Cookies

    Your leftover circus animal cookies can be wrapped in plastic wrap or transferred to an airtight container and stored in the refrigerator.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    These are my favorite desserts to serve with Animal Sprinkle Circus Cookies:

    • Banana Milkshake With Ice Cream: Dip the crunchy, sprinkle-filled cookies into a creamy banana milkshake for a delightful treat.
    • Hot Cocoa Dip: Enjoy the cookies dipped in warm, rich hot cocoa dip for a cozy, comforting snack.
    Cute sprinkle circus cookies.

    🍽 Cookies, Cookies, and More!

    • Best Holiday Spiced Cookies.
      Best Holiday Spiced Cookies
    • Best Brown Butter Cookies Recipe.
      Best Brown Butter Cookies Recipe
    • Crispy Peanut Butter Cookies.
      Crispy Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Chewy Chocolate Peppermint Cookies.
      Chewy Chocolate Peppermint Cookies

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Animal sprinkle circus cookies.

    Animal Sprinkle Circus Cookies

    Angela Milnes
    Bring the fun of the circus to your kitchen with these Animal Sprinkle Circus Cookies! Soft, buttery cookies are topped with colorful sprinkles.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 minutes mins
    Additional Time 22 minutes mins
    Total Time 44 minutes mins
    Course Desserts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 18 Servings
    Calories 977 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 Cup Unsalted Sweet Cream Butter cold, cut into cubes
    • 3 Cup Sugar
    • 4 Eggs
    • 3 teaspoon Pure Vanilla Extract
    • 1 teaspoon Pure Almond Extract
    • 2 teaspoon Cornstarch
    • 2 teaspoon Baking Soda
    • 1 teaspoon Salt
    • 3 Cup Cake Flour
    • 4 Cup All Purpose Flour
    • 3 Cup Chopped Frosted Original Circus Animal Cookies
    • 4 Cup White Chocolate Chips
    • 2 Cup Rainbow Jimmies Sprinkles

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat oven to 400 degrees and line two cookie sheets with parchment paper or silicone baking mat
    • Using a standing mixer, cream together the butter and sugar in a medium bowl until light and fluffy.
    • Beat in the eggs one at a time. Beat in the vanilla until combined.
    • Using a large bowl, whisk together the flour, cornstarch, baking soda, and other ingredients. Gradually whisk in the dry ingredients into the wet until combined and smooth
    • Fold in the chopped frosted original circus animal cookies, white chocolate chips, and sprinkles.
    • Using a medium cookie scoop and kitchen scale, scoop some cookie dough out and weigh the dough to 5.5 oz.
    • Place 6-7 muffin baking rings onto the cookie sheets with lightly floured surface. Roll the dough into a ball and place the dough ball into a baking ring. Gently press the dough ball into a thick disk in the ring.
    • Bake in the oven for 12-14 minutes or until lightly golden around the sides. The center will still be gooey and that's okay because it's the best part!
    • Let the circus animal cookies cool for 10 minutes before enjoying them!

    Notes

    Chill the Dough: Putting the dough in the fridge for a bit makes it easier to handle and helps keep the cookies from spreading too much.
    Roll in Extra Sprinkles: Before baking, roll your cookie dough balls in extra sprinkles for a super colorful treat.
    Try Different Cookie Cutters: Use mini animal cookie cutters for an extra fun twist of animal shapes on your circus-themed treats!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 977kcalCarbohydrates: 137gProtein: 12gFat: 43gSaturated Fat: 24gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 99mgSodium: 446mgPotassium: 187mgFiber: 1gSugar: 85gVitamin A: 696IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 99mgIron: 2mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Cookie Recipes

    • Chocolate Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Peppermint Chai Latte Candy Cane Cookies
    • Baked With Love Valentine Cookies
    • Homemade Pumpkin Cookies
    • Christmas Minnie Mouse Cookies
    • Easy Halloween Cookies
    • Holiday Spiced Cookies

    How To Eat Beetroot: 10 Healthy Beets Recipe Ideas

    June 25, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Beets recipe ideas.

    Beetroot is a nutritious and incredibly versatile vegetable that can be enjoyed in many different dishes. From smoothies to salads, here are 15 delicious and Healthy Beets Recipe Ideas for you to try!

    Healthy Beets Recipe Ideas
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why Eat Beets?

    Beets also known as beetroot is a nutritional powerhouse. It's packed with vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and other essential nutrients that can help keep your body healthy.

    It's also low in calories and fat, yet high in fiber which makes it a great choice for weight loss. Plus, beetroot boasts an array of colorful pigments that can add vibrancy to any dish.

    Why Try These Beets Recipe Ideas?

    No matter if you're looking for a quick and easy breakfast, lunch, dinner, or snack; these beetroot recipes have got you covered.

    From savory to sweet dishes; we’ve included something for everyone! Plus, all of the recipes are made with simple ingredients that can be purchased from any grocery store.

    Beetroot Smoothie Recipe

    This sweet and creamy Beetroot Smoothie is perfect for a quick breakfast or snack. It's a delicious beet recipe and easy to make.

    Ingredients For Beetroot Smoothies

    • 2 small beets, cooked and peeled
    • 1 banana
    • ½ cup orange juice
    • 2 tablespoons almond butter
    • 1 teaspoon honey (optional)

    How To Make A Beetroot Smoothie

    1. Place all ingredients in a blender and blend until smooth.
    2. Pour into glasses and serve immediately.

    Beetroot Salad Recipe

    This vibrant beetroot salad is the perfect side dish for any meal and it's full of healthy nutrients!

    Ingredients For Beetroot Salad

    • 2 beets, cooked and diced - we like to use roasted beets
    • 1 apple, cored and diced
    • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese or goat cheese
    • ¼ cup toasted walnuts
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    How To Make Beetroot Salad

    1. In a bowl, combine the cooked beets, diced apple, feta cheese, and walnuts.
    2. In a separate bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, salt, and pepper. Pour the dressing over the salad and toss to combine.
    3. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

    Beetroot Soup Recipe

    This creamy and comforting beetroot soup is sure to warm you up on a chilly day.

    Ingredients For Beetroot Soup

    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 onion, diced
    • 3 cloves garlic, minced
    • 2 large beets, peeled and cubed
    • 4 cups vegetable broth
    • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    How To Make Beetroot Soup

    1. Heat the olive oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add the onion and garlic and sauté until softened, about 5 minutes.
    2. Add the beets, vegetable broth, thyme, salt, and pepper and bring to a boil. Reduce heat to low and simmer for 20 minutes, or until the beets are soft.
    3. Remove from heat and use an immersion blender to puree the soup until smooth.
    4. Serve warm with a drizzle of extra virgin olive oil and a sprinkle of fresh herbs.

    Easy Roasted Beets

    This easy roasted beet recipe is a delicious and healthy side dish.

    Ingredients For Roasted Beets

    • 4 beets, peeled and cut into wedges
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
    • Salt and pepper to taste

    How To Make Roasted Beets

    1. Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
    2. Place the beets on a baking sheet and drizzle with olive oil, oregano, salt, and pepper. Toss to combine.
    3. Roast for 25-30 minutes, or until tender when pierced with a fork.
    4. Serve warm with a sprinkle of fresh herbs.

    Beetroot Falafel Recipe

    These delicious beet falafels are a great way to enjoy beets in a meal!

    Ingredients For Beetroot Falafel

    • 1 can chickpeas, drained and rinsed
    • 2 beets, peeled and grated
    • ¼ cup chopped fresh parsley
    • 2 cloves garlic, minced
    • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
    • Salt and pepper to taste
    • ⅓ cup all-purpose flour
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for frying

    How To Make Beetroot Falafel

    1. In a food processor, combine the chickpeas, grated beets, parsley, garlic, cumin, salt and pepper. Pulse until combined but still slightly chunky.
    2. Transfer to a bowl and mix in the flour until well combined.
    3. Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Form the falafel mixture into small patties and fry for 3-4 minutes on each side, or until golden brown.

    Beet Carpaccio Recipe

    This elegant dish is perfect for entertaining or a special occasion.

    Beetroot Hummus Recipe

    This flavorful twist on traditional hummus is a great way to sneak in extra veggies. Get our easy beetroot hummus recipe here.

    Pickled Beets

    Try pickled beets as a great way to add a zesty tang to any dish.

    Beetroot Brownies Recipe

    Try fudgy and delicious brownies as a great way to enjoy beets in a sweet treat.

    Beetroot Burgers

    These veggie beetroot and black bean burger is a tasty and nutritious way to enjoy beets.

    FAQ'S

    Can I Add Beet Greens To My Beet Salad?

    Yes, you can add beet greens to your beet salad – just make sure to wash them thoroughly before adding them.
    You can also use the cooked beet greens as a topping for your salad in place of other green leafy vegetables.

    Can I Roast My Beets Instead Of Boiling Them?

    Yes, roasting is another great way to prepare beets. Just make sure to wrap them in foil first before baking them in the oven at 400°F (200°C) for 40-50 minutes, or until tender.

    Can I Make Salad With Raw Beets?

    Yes, you can make a salad with raw beets. Just make sure to shred or grate them very thinly so that they soften enough to eat when tossed with the dressing.
    To save time, you can also use store-bought pre-shredded beets for an even quicker fix!

    Red Or Golden Beets: Which Is Best For Salad?

    Both red and golden beets can be used for salads. Red beets will tend to stain the other ingredients of your salad, while golden beets are milder in flavor – so it really depends on which you prefer!

    Enjoy Beet Recipes All Year Round

    No matter how you choose to enjoy it, adding beetroot to your diet is sure to bring a healthy dose of flavor and nutrition.

    Whether it's for breakfast, lunch, dinner, or a snack in between, these beetroot recipe ideas are sure to please! Enjoy! Beetroot is an incredibly versatile vegetable that can be used in both sweet and savory dishes. Whether you're looking for a healthy snack, side dish, or main course, these beet recipes are sure to satisfy.

    Best Cheese for Roast Beef Sandwich

    June 18, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Cheese for Roast Beef Sandwich.

    What is the Best Cheese For Roast Beef Sandwich? Whether you're a fan of classic flavors or looking for something new, the right cheese can make all the difference on your beef sandwich.

    Best Cheese for Roast Beef Sandwich
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Which Cheese For Roast Beef Sandwich

    To help you navigate the world of cheese sandwiches, consider the following factors: flavor, texture, and reliability. Here are some popular options:

    Hard Cheeses

    Aged Gouda Cheese

    Indulge in the mouthwatering combination of savory roast beef and aged Gouda cheese for an unforgettable sandwich experience. The tender, juicy slices of roast beef are perfectly complemented by the buttery, rich flavor and creamy texture of Gouda, a hard cheese that adds a delightful crunch to every bite.

    As the shredded cheese melts and mingles with the succulent meat, it creates a symphony of flavors that will leave you craving more.

    Aged Gouda Cheese

    Cheddar Cheese

    When creating the perfect roast beef sandwich, selecting the best cheese is necessary for enhancing the overall taste and experience.

    Cheddar cheese, known for its sharp and salty flavor, is considered the best cheese for the roast beef sandwich by many food enthusiasts. The rich taste of cheddar perfectly complements the savory roast beef, elevating the sandwich to new heights of deliciousness.

    Add a layer of melted cheese to roast beef for an even more indulgent treat. This gooey delight adds a creamy texture and intensifies the flavors, making every bite memorable.

    Cheddar Cheese

    Semi-Soft Cheeses

    Swiss Cheese

    Swiss cheese is an excellent choice for melting on roast beef, thanks to its nutty flavor and mild taste that complements the meat without overpowering it.

    This semi-soft cheese is known for its characteristic holes, making it easily recognizable and popular among cheese enthusiasts. When melted, Swiss cheese imparts a creamy and smooth texture to the roast beef, resulting in a delectable fusion of tastes that will gratify your palate.

    Swiss Cheese

    Havarti Cheese

    Havarti Cheese is a delightful addition to roast beef sandwiches, transforming an ordinary meal into a gourmet experience. This semi-soft cheese is known for its slightly sweet flavor and buttery texture, which perfectly complements the savory taste of roast beef.

    When incorporated into a cheese sandwich, Havarti adds a rich, creamy element that balances the robustness of the meat. The buttery flavor of the cheese enhances the overall taste, providing a mouthwatering sensation in every bite.

    Havarti Cheese

    Manchego Cheese

    Manchego cheese has become increasingly popular as the perfect cheese for roast beef sandwiches. The unique combination of roast beef and cheese creates a symphony of flavors that will leave your taste buds craving more.

    Manchego cheese, originating from Spain, offers a rich, nutty flavor that complements the savory notes of the roast beef impeccably.

    Manchego cheese

    Provolone Cheese

    Provolone cheese, a favorite among many, is made from cow's milk and offers a tangy flavor that pairs perfectly with roast beef sandwiches. Known for its signature texture, provolone effortlessly melts into the meat, enhancing the overall taste.

    The smoky flavor complements the rich, juicy roast beef, creating an unforgettable culinary experience. Adding provolone elevates your roast beef sandwich game, leaving you craving more.

    Provolone Cheese

    Blue Cheese

    Blue cheese is an excellent addition to roast beef sandwiches, offering a unique twist to a classic dish. The salty flavor of the blue cheese perfectly complements the savories of the roast beef, while its creamy texture adds richness and depth to the sandwich.

    In addition, the crumbly blue cheese allows it to be easily spread throughout the sandwich, ensuring that each bite is packed with its distinctive taste.

    Blue Cheese

    Pepper Jack Cheese

    The inclusion of pepper jack cheese in roast beef sandwiches adds a delightful twist to the traditional cheese sandwich.

    With its sharp flavor and creamy texture, pepper jack cheese complements the savory taste of roast beef, elevating the overall dining experience.

    Combining these two ingredients creates a harmonious balance between the rich, hearty meat and the spicy kick of the cheese.

    Pepper Jack Cheese

    Monterey Jack Cheese

    Monterey Jack cheese is a delicious and versatile addition to roast beef sandwiches, adding a creamy and mild flavor that complements the savory meat perfectly.

    Made from cow's milk, this semi-hard cheese has a smooth texture that melts beautifully when heated, enhancing the overall taste of the sandwich.

    Monterey Jack Cheese

    Soft Cheeses

    Mozzarella Cheese

    A delightful combination of juicy beef and melted mozzarella cheese creates an unforgettable experience in every bite of a roast beef sandwich.

    The tender, succulent beef is perfectly complemented by the mozzarella cheese's mild flavor, allowing the meat's rich taste to shine. As the cheese melts and mingles with the savory juices of the beef, it adds a creaminess that elevates the overall taste sensation.

    Furthermore, the grassy flavor of the mozzarella cheese adds a fresh and subtle dimension to the sandwich, creating a harmonious blend of flavors that will leave you craving more.

    Mozzarella Cheese

    Brie Cheese

    A roast beef sandwich with brie cheese is a divine combination that brings together the juicy beef and the delicate flavor of cheese made from unpasteurized milk.

    The creamy texture of the brie pairs perfectly with the succulent cuts of beef, resulting in a delectable fusion of tastes that will have your palate craving more.

    Brie Cheese

    Feta Cheese

    Roast beef sandwiches are a classic favorite, known for their tender, flavorful meat and delightful toppings. Adding crumbly cheese, such as feta, introduces a new layer of taste and texture that elevates the sandwich to a new level.

    The tangy, salty flavor of feta cheese perfectly complements roast beef's robust, savory taste, creating a harmonious balance between the two ingredients.

    Feta Cheese

    Gruyere Cheese

    Gruyere cheese is a delicious addition to a roast beef sandwich, elevating the taste with its distinctive flavor. Originating from Switzerland, this medium-hard cheese is known for its nutty and slightly sweet taste, which perfectly complements the savory notes of roast beef.

    The semi-firm texture of Gruyere adds an element of creaminess when melted, making it an ideal choice for creating a gourmet sandwich experience.

    Gruyere Cheese

    How To Choose A Cheese for A Cold Roast Beef Sandwich?

    When selecting the perfect cheese for a cold roast beef sandwich, it's essential to consider the balance of flavors and textures.

    Since roast beef has an intense flavor, choosing a cheese that complements and elevates the taste is crucial. Softer cheeses, such as Brie or Camembert, are ideal choices as they provide a creamy contrast to the robust meat

    FAQ'S

    Is Cheese Good On A Roast Beef Sandwich?

    A roast beef sandwich recipe is incomplete without the perfect roast beef and cheese pairing.
    The combination of flavorful roast beef, with its tender and juicy texture, is beautifully complemented by a creamy and rich cheese that enhances the overall taste of the sandwich.

    What Are Roast Beef Sandwiches Made Of?

    Roast beef sandwiches are delicious and satisfying, perfect for lunch or dinner. These sandwiches feature thinly sliced roast beef layered between Bread slices. Many add mayonnaise for a creamy, tangy flavor.

    What Other Toppings Can Be Used On A Roast Beef Sandwich Besides Cheese And Mayo?

    Worcestershire Sauce: Add a tangy and savory flavor to your roast beef sandwich with a few dashes of Worcestershire Sauce.
    Horseradish Sauce: Spice up your sandwich with a dollop of horseradish sauce for a bold, zesty kick.
    Cheese Sauce: Instead of traditional sliced cheese, smother your roast beef in a rich, creamy cheese sauce for added flavor and texture.
    Dijon Mustard: Swap out mayo for Dijon Mustard to give your roast beef sandwich a tangy, sharp twist.
    Sautéed Onions: Caramelize some onions in olive oil and add them to your roast beef sandwich for a sweet and savory flavor boost.

    Enjoy Cheese On your Sandwich

    The ideal cheese for a roast beef sandwich varies based on personal taste; however, Swiss Cheese is a superb choice that enhances the meat's flavor without dominating it.

    More Useful Articles

    • 15 Best Summer Salads
    • Best Gluten Free Recipes
    • Does Ghee Go Bad?
    • How Long Does Jelly Take To Set?
    • Colorful Winter Salads

    Purple Cauliflower Puree (Mashed Cauliflower)

    June 15, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Mashed purple cauliflower in a bowl.

     Say hello to your new favorite side dish—this Purple Cauliflower Puree is vibrant, velvety, and totally crave-worthy. Whether you call it mashed purple cauliflower or a low-carb mashed cauliflower alternative, this colorful twist on mashed potatoes brings all the comfort without the carbs.

    instant pot cauliflower mash recipe
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Purple cauliflower isn’t just a pretty face—it’s packed with antioxidants like anthocyanins (yep, the same ones found in blueberries), plus fiber, vitamin C, and potassium. It has a slightly sweeter flavor than white cauliflower and mashes like a dream.

    Whether you're after a purple cauliflower side dish to wow dinner guests or need a creative low-carb option for your weeknight menu, this dish has you covered.

    If you're into veggie-forward meals, check out my Beetroot Carpaccio, Grilled Eggplant With Lemon Dip, or Air Fryer Zucchini Fritters for more colorful inspiration.

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Nutrient-packed: Rich in antioxidants and essential vitamins—bonus points for that gorgeous color.
    • Naturally gorgeous: The deep purple hue makes it a total showstopper.
    • Creamy, comforting & low-carb: All the mashed potato vibes, minus the carbs.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Mashed Cauliflower Ingredients.
    • Purple Cauliflower: Mild, slightly sweet, and loaded with nutrients and color.
    • Milk (or cream): For a silky, creamy texture.
    • Butter: Rich flavor and smooth finish.
    • Sea Salt & Pepper: Essential seasoning duo.
    • Chives or Herbs: Bright, fresh finishing touch.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Go extra creamy! I love swapping milk for coconut milk or heavy cream for a super silky mash.
    • Cheese, please! Parmesan, cheddar, or a little cream cheese make this mash next-level delicious.
    • Garlic all the way! Roasted garlic blended in? Yes, yes, and yes—so much flavor!
    • Freshen it up! I toss in rosemary or parsley for that herby, just-right touch.
    • Mix it up! Sometimes, I blend in mashed turnips or parsnips for extra texture and flavor fun.

    Love mashed veggie sides? You’ll also love my Cheesy Cauliflower Mash and Air Fryer Baby Bella Mushrooms.

    🔪 How To Make Purple Cauliflower Puree.

    purple cauliflower in instant pot
    1. Step 1: To steam your cauliflower in the Instant Pot, place one cup of water in the bottom of your inner pot. Place a trivet and steamer basket into the pot.
    purple cauliflower in instant pot
    1. Step 2: Wash and trim your head of cauliflower and then chop the purple cauliflower into florets or cook as a whole cauliflower. Keep as much of the stem as you like! Its all edible and will mash really well once steamed.
    3 minutes instant pot pressure time
    1. Step 3: Close the Instant Pot lid, set the to pressure cook for 2 minutes on high pressure
    release steam on instant pot
    1. Step 4: Once the purple cauliflower is steamed, release the steam from the Instant Pot using a manual release.
    instant pot purple cauliflower
    1. Step 5: Place your steamed cauliflower in a blender or food processor. I use a Vitamix but you can use any food processor you have.
    Purple Cauliflower in the blender
    1. Step 6: Add your milk, butter, salt, pepper.
    Purple Cauliflower Recipe
    1. Step 7: Let the processor roll until you achieve desired consistency.
    instant pot cauliflower mash recipe
    1. Step 8: Your purple cauliflower mash is now ready to be served. Garnish with your favorite herbs or chives and enjoy!

    💡Hint: No Instant Pot? You can steam the cauliflower on the stovetop until fork-tender—easy and just as effective.

    Mashed purple cauliflower puree in a white dish with butter and a metal spoon.

    Visual Appeal & Serving Style Tips

    Visual Appeal & Serving Style Tips
    This dish doesn’t just taste good—it’s a looker, too.

    • Base layer: Spoon it under grilled salmon, steak, or roasted vegetables for a restaurant-worthy plate.
    • Garnish for contrast: Try feta crumbles, crispy onions, or a swirl of green herb oil to make that purple pop.
    • Elegant ramekins: Great for dinner parties or plated holiday meals.
    • Smooth vs. rustic: Puree for silky luxury or leave a bit of texture for a heartier mash.

    💡Pro tip: White plates and light-colored dishes really show off the purple!

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • To Thicken Cauliflower Mash: If you find your cauliflower mash is too runny or watery for your liking, there are a few tricks to help thicken it up. If you have an immersion blender, blend the mashed cauliflower on low speed in circular motions until it starts to thicken. Alternatively, you can place the cauli mash in a food processor and pulse until it thickens.
    • Thicken On The Stove Top: You can also cook the mashed cauliflower on the stove top for a few minutes to evaporate some of the moisture and help thicken it up.
    • Want it ultra-smooth? Use a high-speed blender or food mill for next-level silkiness.

    💭 Purple Cauliflower Puree FAQs

    How does purple cauliflower compare to the regular variety for mashing?

    Purple cauliflower has a subtle sweetness and a naturally vibrant hue that holds up well during cooking. Its creamy texture makes for a satisfying mash, and its striking color adds a fun twist to a familiar dish.

    Can I prepare the mashed purple cauliflower ahead of time?

    Absolutely. Prepare your mash as usual, let it cool, and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. When you're ready to serve, a gentle reheat possibly with a splash of cream or milk will bring it right back to its silky consistency.

    Which seasonings bring out the best in this dish?

    Simple ingredients work wonders here. A dash of salt and pepper, a drizzle of olive oil or a pat of butter, and a hint of garlic can really elevate the flavor. Some cooks even like a squeeze of lemon or a sprinkle of smoked paprika for an extra kick.

    Is purple cauliflower available all year round?

    Not always! It's most common in cooler months, but check specialty grocers or farmers markets.

    Best Way to Store Mashed Cauliflower

    Allow the mashed cauliflower to cool completely before transferring it to an airtight container. Store it in the refrigerator, for 3 to 4 days, or place it in freezer if you plan to keep it longer. When reheating, add a small splash of milk or broth to revive the creamy consistency.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

     This purple cauliflower side dish pairs beautifully with:

    • Pesto Roasted Chicken
    • Sabana De Res
    • Air Fried Salmon
    • Air Fryer Cod Fillets
    • Homemade White Bread

    You can even use the cauli mash as a side dish to your favorite pasta or soup! Cauliflower mashed potatoes or puree is also great with some freshly baked bread for dipping. Enjoy!

    🌟 Also try it with:

    • Quinoa-stuffed peppers
    • Grilled tofu with chimichurri
    • Seared pork medallions
    • Lentil or barley stew
    • Roasted carrots and beets for a full veg feast

    Use it in place of mashed potatoes or serve it up as a visually stunning side for your next dinner party.

    Purple Cauliflower Recipe

    🍽 More Veggie Puree Recipes

    • Easy Pureed Leeks in a bowl.
      Easy Pureed Leeks Recipe
    • mashed carrots pureed carrots recipe.
      Carrot Puree Recipe For Infants
    • pureed peas for babies.
      Simple Pureed Peas Recipe
    • puree squash recipe
      Easy Pureed Squash Recipe

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Mashed purple cauliflower in a bowl.

    Purple Cauliflower Puree

    Angela Milnes
    Add a pop of color to your plate with this Purple Cauliflower Mash! Creamy, smooth, and packed with nutrients, this vibrant twist on traditional mashed potatoes is as delicious as it is eye-catching.
    5 from 19 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Additional Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine Vegetables
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 71 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 Purple Cauliflower
    • ¼ Cup Milk
    • 1 Tablespoon Butter
    • ½ Teaspoon Sea Salt
    • ¼ Teaspoon Cracked Black Pepper
    • ¼ cup Herbs fresh

    Instructions
     

    • Wash and trim your purple cauliflower into florets. Keep as much of the stem as you like! Its all edible and will mash really well once steamed.
    • Steam your cauliflower on the stove top in a steamer basket for 10-12 minutes until fork soft.
    • Place your steamed cauliflower in a blender or food processor. I use a Vitamux but you can use any food processor you have. Add your milk, butter, salt, pepper and let the processor roll!
    • Your purple cauliflower mash is now ready to be served. Garnish with your favorite herbs or chives and enjoy!

    Notes

    To steam your cauliflower in the Instant Pot, place one cup of water in the bottom of your inner pot. Place a trivet and steamer basket into the pot and add the florets.
    Close the Instant Pot lid, set the to pressure cook for 2 minutes on high pressure. Once the purple cauliflower is steamed, release the steam from the Instant Pot using a manual release.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 71kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 3gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 9mgSodium: 362mgPotassium: 460mgFiber: 3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 192IUVitamin C: 70mgCalcium: 55mgIron: 1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Do your kids love different Colored Veggies? What’s their fave? Let me know if they love this best cauliflower mash recipe.

    More Veggie Recipes To Try:

    • Air Fryer Baby Bella Mushrooms
    • Air Fryer Zucchini Fritters
    • Grilled Eggplant With Lemon Dip
    • Air Fryer Corn On The Cob Recipe
    • Beetroot Carpaccio

    Make Ahead Bacon And Egg Casserole Recipe

    May 31, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Bacon and egg casserole in a pan.

    If you love bacon and eggs then you're going to love this delicious Bacon And Egg Casserole with tomatoes. This dish is an easy and flavorful breakfast or brunch option for any time of the year and even better it's a make ahead casserole that can keep in the freezer for another day.

    If you love bacon and eggs then you're going to love this delicious bacon and egg casserole with tomatoes.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    If you love casseroles you may want to try this Chicken And Swiss Casserole or this delicious Chicken And Rice Casserole.

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • One Pan Meal: This bacon breakfast casserole dish is a simple one-pan meal that requires minimal effort.
    • Simple Cooking: The bacon and egg casserole can be made ahead of time and refrigerated or frozen for later.
    • Delicious: It's also packed with flavor and the tomatoes add a nice pop of color to the dish.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Here are the ingredients needed for bacon and egg casserole:

    • Eggs
    • Cooked Bacon
    • Cottage Cheese
    • Plum Tomato
    • Fresh Spinach
    • Shredded Cheddar Cheese
    • Teaspoon Salt
    • Pinch Fresh Pepper

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    Optional Additions:

    There are plenty of ingredients that can be added to this bacon and egg casserole.. here are a few suggestions to mix it up:

    • Sautéed Mushrooms or Peppers
    • Diced Bell Pepper
    • Sauteéd Green Onions
    • Cooked Potatoes
    • Chopped Ham
    • Shredded Cheese of your choice (cheddar, Monterey jack, pepper jack etc)
    • Chopped Spinach
    • Cooked sausage or ground beef can also be added to bacon egg casserole for a heartier dish.

    Optional Spices:

    We use salt and pepper in this recipe but you are free to add other spices such as:

    • Onion powder
    • Garlic Powder
    • Paprika
    • Cayenne Pepper
    • Chili Powder
    • Italian Seasoning or Herbs De Provence

    Read here for the Best Seasoning For Scrambled Eggs.

    🔪 How To Make Bacon And Egg Casserole

    1. Step 1: In a large bowl, beat eggs. Then add cooked bacon, cottage cheese, tomato, spinach, Swiss & salt & pepper. Stir until well combined.
    2. Step 2: Pour the egg mixture into a 9-inch pie plate or prepared baking dish.
    3. Step 3: Preheat oven to 350°F. Cook for 30-35 minutes until the center is cooked through.
    4. Step 4: Garnish with fresh parsley and serve while warm or cool to room temperature. Enjoy your bacon egg casserole!
    Make Ahead Bacon And Egg Casserole Recipe

    Hint: Be sure not to overcook as this will dry out the casserole. Enjoy your bacon egg casserole! I hope you enjoy this delicious and easy to make breakfast recipe! Happy cooking!

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    Pre-Cook for Perfection: Give your bacon a head start by cooking it until it’s nearly crispy. This step not only keeps your casserole from getting overly greasy but also preserves a satisfying crunch in every bite.

    Creamy Swap: If you’re looking to add a richer, creamier texture to your dish, consider swapping cottage cheese for cream cheese. This tweak can subtly transform the flavor profile without overwhelming the other ingredients.

    Customize with Spices: While the recipe keeps it simple with salt and pepper, a light dusting of garlic powder, paprika, or even a sprinkle of fresh herbs like chives can add an extra layer of depth to your casserole. Experiment with these to find your perfect balance.

    Master the Make-Ahead: When preparing your casserole ahead of time, ensure you cool it completely before wrapping it tightly for storage. Thawing it slowly in the fridge overnight and reheating in a preheated oven helps maintain its moisture and prevents it from drying out.

    💭 FAQs

    What's A Casserole?

    Casseroles are a type of dish that usually contains two or more ingredients. In this case, the star ingredients are bacon and eggs. Casseroles are usually baked in one single dish and can include vegetables, cheese or other items. This easy breakfast casserole with bacon is super tasty and one the whole family will love.

    Is Egg Casserole With Bacon Healthy?

    This particular egg casserole is a healthy and nutritious option. It's low in calories but full of flavor thanks to the combination of bacon, eggs, tomatoes and herbs. The bacon adds a nice smoky flavor to the dish and it provides protein as well as fat. It's an easy breakfast casserole recipe and is super simple to make.

    Is This A Breakfast Egg Casserole?

    Yes, this is a bacon breakfast egg casserole. It's perfect for feeding a crowd at a brunch or for making ahead of time so you can pop it in the oven on busy mornings.

    Can I Cook Bacon Before Adding To The Casserole?

    Wondering if you can cook the bacon before adding it to your egg casserole? Yes, for best results it is recommended that you cook the bacon before adding it to the casserole. This way you’ll have better control over how crispy or soft the bacon pieces will be and they won’t overcook in the oven.

    How to Freeze Egg Casserole Before Cooking?

    If you choose to freeze simply place the pie plate, uncovered in the freezer. Check after a couple of hours to make sure the eggs have frozen. Then cover with foil or a lid. Once frozen, you can then stack the egg casseroles if you've made more than one. like to get large rolls of Plastic Wrap, which I use to wrap each individual casserole before freezing.

    How To Store Leftover Breakfast Casserole?

    We recommend storing the casserole in the fridge for up to 3 days. Once the casserole is cooked, allow it to cool for some time. Once cooled down, wrap the dish tightly with plastic wrap and then with foil. You can also freeze this recipe for up to 3 months.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    These are my favorite side dishes to serve with bacon and egg casserole:

    • Fresh Fruit Salad: A colorful fruit salad made with seasonal fruits such as berries, melons, grapes, and citrus segments adds a refreshing contrast to the richness of the casserole. It also provides a burst of vitamins and fiber to start the day off right.
    • Breakfast Potatoes: Crispy roasted potatoes or hash browns make a hearty and satisfying accompaniment to a breakfast casserole. Season them with herbs and spices for extra flavor.
    • Yogurt Parfait: Serve individual yogurt parfaits layered with Greek yogurt, granola, and fresh berries. It's a light and healthy option that pairs well with the heartiness of the casserole.

    🍽 Easy Mornings Start Here

    • Breakfast Potatoes With Peppers And Bacon.
      Diced Breakfast Potatoes (Fresh or Frozen)
    • Breakfast Sliders With Sausage, Egg And Cheese.
      Breakfast Sliders With Sausage, Egg And Cheese
    • Air Fryer Sausage Breakfast Bites.
      Air Fryer Sausage Breakfast Bites (High Protein + Freezer Friendly)
    • Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream.
      Breakfast Taco Recipe with Harissa Lime Sour Cream

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Bacon and egg casserole in a pan.

    Bacon And Egg Casserole

    Angela Milnes
    Start your day right with a hearty Bacon and Egg Casserole! This satisfying dish layers crispy bacon, fluffy eggs, and savory cheese in a delicious, easy-to-make casserole.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 22 minutes mins
    Course Dinners
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 132 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 6 Eggs
    • ½ cup Cooked Bacon approx 5 pieces, chopped
    • ½ cup Cottage Cheese
    • 1 Plum Tomato seeded & chopped
    • ¼ cup Fresh Spinach chopped
    • ¼ cup Shredded Cheddar Cheese
    • ¼ Teaspoon Salt
    • Pinch fresh pepper

    Instructions
     

    • In a large bowl, beat eggs. Then add cooked bacon, cottage cheese, tomato, spinach, swiss & salt & pepper. Stir until well combined.
    • Pour the egg mixture into a 9 inch pie plate or prepared baking dish.
    • Preheat oven to 350. Cook for 30-35 minutes until the center is cooked through.
    • Garnish with fresh parsley and serve while warm or cool to room temperature. Enjoy your bacon egg casserole!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 132kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 10gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 26mgSodium: 390mgPotassium: 144mgFiber: 0.2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 246IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 78mgIron: 0.2mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Casserole Recipes

    If You Like This Easy Egg Breakfast Casserole You May Like the Following:

    • Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream
    • Healthy Mexican Breakfast Casserole
    • Healthy Breakfast Egg Muffins
    • Air Fryer Tater Tot Casserole
    • Sloppy Joe Cornbread Casserole
    Make Ahead Bacon And Egg Casserole Recipe

    Strawberry Sangria Recipe (With Mint)

    May 30, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Fresh Fruit Strawberry Sangria.

    This Strawberry Sangria Recipe is fruity, fizzy, and irresistibly refreshing. With sweet strawberries, citrusy lemon, and fresh mint in every glass, this strawberry mint sangria is your go-to drink for summer parties, brunches, and BBQs.

    Strawberry Sangria Hero 1

    Strawberry Sangria is a warm-weather twist on the classic Spanish punch—typically made with wine, fruit, and a splash of spirit. This version adds fresh mint for an herbaceous twist and sparkling strawberry water to lighten things up. Whether you're sipping it poolside or mixing a batch for friends, it’s a fun and fruity crowd-pleaser.

    If you love fruity drinks, try my Brazilian Limeade or this Easy Mangonada next!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Bright, Fruity Flavor: Strawberries, lemon, mint, and rosé create a juicy, refreshing combo.
    • Perfect for Entertaining: Big-batch friendly and easy to make ahead.
    • Super Customizable: This strawberry mint sangria is to adjust to your favorite fruits or switch up the base wine.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Strawberry Sangria Ingredients
    • Rosé Wine: A fruity base that balances sweetness and acidity. You can use dry or sweet, depending on your vibe.
    • Vodka: A splash gives it a kick—totally optional.
    • Strawberry Sparkling Water: Adds fizz and subtle berry flavor.
    • Fresh Strawberries + Lemon Slices: Classic and juicy. I always use ripe strawberries for the best natural sweetness.
    • Fresh Mint: I crush it slightly before mixing to bring out all that cool, refreshing aroma.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Swap the Spirits: Try gin, rum, tequila, or brandy instead of vodka.
    • Try White or Red Wine: Sauvignon Blanc for crispness or a light red like Pinot Noir for depth.
    • Mocktail Version: Skip the vodka and wine; double the sparkling water and add a splash of citrus juice.
    • More Fruit Ideas: Popular versions include raspberries, orange slices, apples, peaches, or lemon-lime soda.

    🍓 Strawberrt Sangria Flavor Pairing Ideas

    Want to riff on the flavors? Try one of these dreamy combos:

    Flavor PairVibe
    Strawberry + MintClassic, cool, and garden-fresh
    Strawberry + LemonBright and zesty
    Strawberry + BasilEarthy and unexpected
    Strawberry + GingerBold with a peppery finish
    Strawberry + OrangeFruity and juicy

    Looking for perfect pairings? This strawberry mint sangria is fabulous alongside light summer appetizers like Air Fryer Zucchini Fritters, Beetroot Hummus with Crostini, Caprese Skewers, or Avocado Deviled Eggs.

    🔪 How To Make Strawberry Mint Sangria?

    Intrigued? Here’s how to make strawberry mint sangria:

    Strawberry Sangria
    1. Step 1: Cut the stems off of the strawberries, then slice them in half. Slice the lemons, then slice them in half.
    Strawberry Sangria
    1. Step 2: Add the sliced strawberries, lemon slices and mint leaves to a large pitcher.
    Strawberry Sangria
    1. Step 3: Pour in the bottle of rosé.
    Strawberry Sangria
    1. Step 4: Add vodka. Stir gently, and chill for 4 hours. Add the sparkling water before serving this gorgeous drink! Grab the wine glasses and prepare to enjoy this sparkling wine strawberry sangria recipe.

    💡 Hint: Freeze extra sangria into ice cube trays! They make a fun way to chill your next glass without watering it down.

    Strawberry Sangria Hero

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    Ready to nail this Strawberry Mint Sangria? You may want to take note of these tips and tricks too!

    • Use ripe strawberries: The riper, the sweeter.
    • Mint matters: Gently muddle it—don’t mash, or it’ll taste bitter.
    • Chill before adding bubbles: Helps preserve the fizz!
    • More Flavor: Want more berry flavor? Try macerating strawberries in a spoonful of sugar for 10 minutes before adding to the pitcher.
    • Make ahead: Mix everything but the sparkling water a day in advance.

    💭 FAQs

    Can I use frozen fruit in strawberry sangria?

    Yes! Frozen strawberries or mixed berries work well and help chill the drink too.

    Can I skip the vodka in this strawberry mint sangria?

    Absolutely. Just use more sparkling water or add fruit juice for flavor.

    How long does strawberry sangria last?

    It’s best within 3 days. After that, the fruit gets soggy and the flavors start to fade.

    Can you make strawberry sangria ahead of time?

    Yes, you can make sangria ahead of time! Just add the fruit to a pitcher, pour in the wine and vodka. Stir gently and chill for 4-6 hours. Add sparkling water right before serving. Enjoy!

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    Whether you’re serving this strawberry mint sangria at brunch or on the patio, it pairs beautifully with the following:

    • Pair with Light Bites: Cheesy Stuffed Peppers, Berry Granola Bites, or Caprese Mini Pizzas.
    • Serve Chilled: Best over ice in big glasses or mason jars.
    • Garnish Creatively: Add extra mint sprigs, lemon wheels, or sugar rims.

    🧊 Leftover Hack: This strawberry sangria recipe freezes beautifully—just pour into silicone molds and use the cubes in your next batch for a no-melt chill.

    Strawberry Sangria Hero 2

    🍽 Try These Fantastic Drinks

    • Grapefruit Rosemary Mocktail.
      Grapefruit Rosemary Mocktail
    • Cranberry Lime Mocktail.
      Easy Cranberry Lime Mocktail Recipe – No Alcohol, All Sparkle!
    • Mangonada in a glass.
      Best Mangonada Recipe (Mango Chamoyada Drink)
    • Passion Fruit Juice.
      Best Passion Fruit Juice Recipe

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Fresh Fruit Strawberry Sangria.

    Fresh Fruit Strawberry Sangria Recipe

    Angela Milnes
    Bursting with the juicy flavors of fresh strawberries and a medley of fruits, this sangria is the perfect blend of sweet and tangy.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Drinks
    Cuisine Spanish
    Servings 5 Servings
    Calories 106 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 750 ml Rosé Wine
    • 8 oz Vodka
    • 12 oz Strawberry Sparkling Water
    • 4- 6 Fresh strawberries
    • 1 Sliced Lemon
    • 8-10 Fresh Mint Leaves

    Instructions
     

    • Cut the stems off of the strawberries, then slice them in half. Slice the lemons, then slice them in half.
    • Add the sliced strawberries, lemon slices and mint leaves to a large pitcher. Pour in the bottle of rosé and vodka. Stir gently, and chill for 4 hours.
    • Add the sparkling water before serving this gorgeous drink!
    • Grab the wine glasses and prepare to enjoy this sparkling wine strawberry sangria recipe.
    • Here is my favorite glass pitcher, perfect for summer drinks. This pitcher is can take 1.5 Litres of liquid and is made of thick glass, so it’s great for those hot summer days.
    • My husband bought us some olive wood cocktail forks in Spain but I love the simplicity of these wooden dessert forks. Perfect for olives!

    Notes

    To make a non-alcoholic version of this sangria, simple omit the vodka and add an additional 8 oz of sparkling water. or club soda.
    A splash of lime juice, orange juice or grapefruit juice can also be added for extra flavor.
    You'll have a sweet sangria without the wine soaked fruit that can be enjoyed by the while family. They will love this refreshing cocktail!
    Enjoy your Sangria with friends & family and cheers to summer! Bon appetite!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 106kcalCarbohydrates: 0.2gProtein: 0.1gFat: 0.02gSaturated Fat: 0.004gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.01gSodium: 1mgPotassium: 10mgFiber: 0.1gVitamin A: 68IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 4mgIron: 0.1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    8 Grain Free Healthy Lunch Box Ideas

    May 30, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Grain free lunch box ideas.

    Everyone gets in a lunch box slump. Especially after the shiny newness has worn off the old lunchbox. If you’re looking for some healthy lunch box ideas then you've come to the right place. Also, If you’re tired of the sandwich slump or maybe you have a little one who can’t eat grains then this is the post for you!

    I’ve got 8 super easy, grain free lunch box ideas & the best part is, they can all fit conveniently into your Bento Box.

    8 Grain Free Healthy Lunch Box Ideas
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Lunch Time Need Not Be Difficult

    My best advice when making lunches is think ahead! Some of my daughter’s favorite lunch box items are simply leftovers from dinner! Sometimes dinner fits perfectly into the lunch box & sometimes you just have to think of ways of switching it up a bit. All the suggestions that can be made from leftover dinners are highlighted!

    Check out my post on healthy travel snacks for kids.

    Lunch Box Ideas For Kids And Adults

    These easy lunch idea are great for both kids and adults. So if you're wanting to do some meal planning for work then you may want to use these as adult lunch box ideas.

    Why Are Healthy Lunches Important For Kids?

    Healthy lunches are important for kids because they not only provide nutrition, but they also help fuel the mind and body with energy throughout the day. Eating healthy at lunchtime can help to reduce stress, improve focus in school, increase alertness and prevent mid-afternoon dips in energy levels.

    8 grain free lunch box ideas

    8 Great Grain Free Lunch Box Ideas

    So here are 8 fantastic lunch box ideas that are grain free.

    1. BREAKFAST FOR LUNCH

    Breakfast for dinner? Anyone can do that! Surpise your kids with breakfast for lunch. Whip up a quick omelette or make my Mushroom & Zucchini Frittata.

    2. STUFFED AVOCADO

    Perfect, portable & even comes in it’s own half shell. Stuff your avocado with any mixture like tuna or chicken salad. Worried about mayo sitting in the lunch box? Make a refreshing salad of Extra Virgin Olive Oil, fresh dill, salt & pepper! Check out these recipes for stuffed avocados!

    3. APPLE SANDWICHES

    My kids favorite! The apple sandwich. Typically this is our dessert around here but the kids wouold be over the moon to find it in their lunch box. You can use Sun Butter (made of sunflower seeds) if your school is nut free. Add some Enjoy Life chocolate chips (gluten, diary, nut & soy free) & lunch is served!

    4. PORK CHOP, APPLE & CHEESE

    Leftover chops from dinner? I know it doesn’t happen very often but let’s say you grill up a couple of extras for lunch. Chop them up & serve with apples & cheese!

    5. SPAGHETTI SQUASH & MARINARA

    Spaghetti squash is delicious with butter & salt but add some marinara or fresh cherry tomatoes for a non noodley treat. Check out this simple recipe for Roasted Spaghetti Squash!

    6. MEATBALLS

    Everyone has a favorite meatball recipe. I like to add kale to mine! Save a few of those babies before the kids grab them up & they’ll be excited to see them again in the next day’s lunch box! Check out this easy recipe for Buffalo Sauce Meatballs.

    7. BOILED EGGS

    Boiled eggs – the perfect meal. Some kids love em, some kids don’t. I like to make mine even more fun by using these fun egg molds. I mean, who can say no to those cute molds??

    8. STEAK & PEPPERS

    Again, take an opportunity from dinner to slice up some nice steak for the kiddos. Full of protein, tastes good hot or cold (or that’s just me) & make things colorful by throwing in some raw bell peppers. Check out this steak fajitas! So yummy!

    More Healthy Lunch Box Foods

    For more healthy lunch box ideas, try the following:

    • Tortilla chips with black bean dip
    • Canned Tuna on gluten free crackers - this is one of my favorite gluten free lunch ideas.
    • Green Salad with chicken and feta cheese
    • Brown rice with chicken broth, veggies and shrimp
    • Mini veggie burgers with hummus - try making your own veggie burgers for a healthier option.
    • Fruit salad - fresh fruit is always great in a bento box!
    • Hard boiled eggs, carrots and celery slices - these are also great snacks that can be added to the lunch box.
    • Celery sticks and nut butter or almond butter
    • Frozen Fruit and greek yogurt
    • Grilled Chicken and quinoa salad - you'll love the Mediterranean flavors.

    Make A Balanced Lunch

    The key to a great balanced lunch box is having enough food from the different food groups.

    Try to include at least 1 serving of protein, complex carbohydrates and fruits or vegetables. It is also important to pack something that your child will actually eat so make sure you ask them for their opinion.

    Make Meal Prep Easy

    Packing lunch the night before is a great way to make meal prep easy for work or school. However if you want to fill your lunch boxes in the morning, then feel free to do so, both methods work well.

    Best Containers For Lunches

    When it comes to packing lunch boxes, the right container can make all the difference. Look for containers that are BPA and lead-free, microwave safe, airtight and leak proof. Mason jars are a great option as well as stainless steel bento boxes or divided plastic containers with compartments. This will help keep food fresh and organized.

    Fresh Veggies and Fruit Is Key

    The key is having healthy food, fresh fruit, fresh veggies and lots of creative ideas. From colourful vegetable sticks such as carrot sticks to apple slices and mixed berries, you can fill your lunch box with great ideas. Don't forget the plant based protein!

    Allergies And Restrictions

    If your child has allergies or dietary restrictions, you can still have a healthy and delicious lunch box. Look for vegan and gluten free options such as vegan wraps, quinoa bowls or chickpea salads.

    There are also lots of allergy friendly snacks that can be added in to the mix such as gluten free crackers, rice cakes and nut free trail mix. If you’re dealing with a nut-free school, sunflower seed butter is a great alternative to traditional nut butters!

    The idea is to make lunch fun and enjoyable for everyone involved! With a little bit of creativity and planning, you can easily come up with interesting and delicious gluten free lunch ideas if needed.

    What Do You Put In Your Lunch Box?

    What do you pack in your lunch box? Share your ideas below, and be sure to check out these other great ideas for healthy lunch boxes!

    What Does Turmeric Taste Like?

    May 29, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Turmeric powder in a bowl and fresh turmeric.

    Turmeric, also known as Indian saffron or golden spice, is one of the world's healthiest and most healing spices. So let's answer the question: What Does Turmeric Taste Like?

    Raw turmeric and turmeric powder.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Does Turmeric Taste Like?

    What does turmeric taste like, you ask? This vibrant spice has a unique and complex flavor profile that makes it a beloved ingredient in Indian cuisine and beyond.

    Turmeric tastes like a delightful combination of earthy sweet taste and a mildly pungent flavor, with just a hint of peppery taste. This distinctive mix of flavors adds depth and warmth to a wide range of dishes, particularly in Southeast Asia.

    While its taste is not overpowering, turmeric's presence can elevate the overall flavor experience, harmonizing with other spices and ingredients to create a rich and satisfying meal.

    Is Turmeric Spicy?

    Turmeric is not inherently spicy in the way that chili peppers or black pepper might be. Instead, it has a unique flavor profile that combines earthy, slightly bitter, and subtly sweet notes to create a warm and inviting taste.

    So, while turmeric is a spice that can add depth and richness to your meals, you don't need to worry about it setting your taste buds on fire.

    Does Turmeric Taste Like Mustard?

    While both turmeric and mustard share some similarities in flavor, they are distinct in their taste profiles. As mentioned earlier, turmeric has an earthy, slightly bitter, and subtly sweet taste that imparts a warm sensation to your dishes.

    On the other hand, mustard – especially when made from mustard seeds – tends to have a sharp, tangy, and sometimes even pungent flavor.

    You might associate the two because turmeric is often used as a key ingredient in mustard products, contributing to their vibrant yellow color and adding depth to their flavor.

    Turmeric powder and mustard powder.

    Does Turmeric Taste Like Curry?

    Turmeric is one of the many spices commonly used in curry blends, so you might associate the two flavors. However, it's important to note that curry is not a single flavor but a combination of various spices, such as cumin, coriander, chili powder, and turmeric.

    Each of these spices contributes a unique taste to create the complex and aromatic profile we know as curry.

    Curry cooked using turmeric.

    What Does Turmeric Powder Taste Like?

    Turmeric powder is made from the Curcuma longa plant's dried roots, giving it a lovely golden hue. When it comes to taste, turmeric powder offers an earthy, slightly bitter, and mildly sweet flavor profile that can add warmth and depth to various dishes.

    This distinctive flavor makes turmeric powder popular in many Indian dishes, especially Indian and Southeast Asian recipes.

    What Does Turmeric Tea Taste Like?

    Turmeric tea tastes warm, earthy, and slightly bitter, with a hint of natural sweetness. This tea is an infusion made from turmeric powder or fresh turmeric root. The taste can be described as warm, comforting, and invigorating, making it a perfect sip for any time of day.

    Turmeric tea is often combined with other ingredients, such as fresh ginger, cinnamon, black pepper, honey, or lemon, enhancing its flavor. These combinations create a well-rounded and soothing taste experience that many people enjoy.

    Turmeric tea.

    What Does Turmeric Paste Taste Like?

    Turmeric paste, also known as golden paste, is a mixture of ground turmeric, water, and other ingredients like black pepper and coconut oil. Turmeric paste has a slightly bitter taste with a strong earthy aroma reminiscent of mustard or ginger.

    The flavor of turmeric paste can be described as warm, spicy, and slightly pungent, with a subtle sweetness.

    Turmeric paste in a bowl and raw turmeric on side.

    What Does Golden Milk Taste Like?

    Golden milk, also known as turmeric latte, is a warm and comforting beverage made from a blend of turmeric, milk (or a dairy-free alternative), and other spices like cinnamon, ginger, and black pepper. The taste of Golden milk can be described as a harmonious mix of earthy, slightly sweet, and gently spiced flavors.

    To enhance its natural sweetness and create a more indulgent experience, some people like to add a touch of golden syrup, honey, or another sweetener of their choice.

    Golden milk made of turmeric and milk.

    How to Balance the Bitterness of Turmeric?

    Whether you're using fresh turmeric or ground turmeric, there are many ways to counteract the bitterness and create a more harmonious flavor in your dishes.

    One popular option is to combine turmeric with creamy ingredients like coconut milk or plant milk, which can help mellow out the bitterness while adding a touch of richness to your recipes. Another tip is to mix turmeric with sweeter liquids, such as orange juice or maple syrup, which can lend a natural sweetness and brighten the overall taste.

    Incorporating other sweeter spices, like cinnamon, nutmeg, or cardamom, can also work wonders in reducing the bitterness of turmeric and enhancing the flavor complexity of your dish. The key is experimenting with different combinations and finding the right balance that suits your taste buds.

    Can You Eat Raw Turmeric?

    Yes, you can eat raw turmeric. Raw turmeric can be grated, chopped, or juiced and added to salads, smoothies, juices, or other recipes. However, it is essential to remember that turmeric has a strong flavor and can stain surfaces, so use it in moderation and be cautious when handling it.

    What Dishes Do You Use Turmeric In?

    Turmeric is a versatile spice used in a wide variety of dishes to add flavor, color, and potential health benefits. Here are some popular dishes that incorporate turmeric:

    1. Air Fryer Chicken Shawarma

    This flavorful dish features marinated chicken with a blend of spices, including turmeric, cooked perfectly in an air fryer. The turmeric adds a warm, earthy depth to the shawarma's taste, making it a delicious and satisfying meal. Be sure to check out this recipe for Air Fryer Chicken Shawarma.

    Chicken Shawarma.

    2. Creamy Instant Pot Butter Chicken

    A classic Indian dish, this creamy butter chicken recipe incorporates turmeric to create a beautiful golden hue and enhance the overall flavor. The combination of spices and creamy tomato sauce makes this dish a true comfort food delight. Don't miss out on trying this delectable Creamy Instant Pot Butter Chicken.

    Butter chicken with rice in a bowl.

    3. Instant Pot Vegan Corn Soup

    Turmeric adds a pop of color and a hint of earthiness to this comforting vegan corn soup made in an Instant Pot. The combination of sweet corn, spicy jalapeño, and other savory ingredients creates a deliciously balanced flavor. Give this wholesome Instant Pot Vegan Corn Soup recipe a try!

    Vegan Corn Soup.

    4. Air Fryer Onion Rings

    While turmeric may not be the star ingredient in these crispy air-fryer onion rings, it contributes subtle warmth and color to the batter. The result is a tasty and healthier alternative to traditional deep-fried onion rings. Be sure to explore this recipe for scrumptious Air Fryer Onion Rings.

    onion rings.

    5. Air Fryer Carrot Fries

    Turmeric adds a touch of earthiness and color to these healthy and delicious carrot fries made in an air fryer. These fries are a delightful alternative to traditional potato fries packed with flavor. Don't hesitate to try this creative and nutritious Air Fryer Carrot Fries recipe.

    Air fried carrots.

    How to Store Turmeric Root?

    To store fresh turmeric root and turmeric powder properly, follow these guidelines:

    Storing Fresh Turmeric Root

    To store fresh turmeric root, wrap it in a paper towel or clean cloth and place it in an airtight container. Store the container in the refrigerator's vegetable drawer, where it should keep for up to two weeks.

    If you notice any moisture on the paper towel or cloth, replace it with a dry one to prevent mold growth.

    For long-term storage, you can also freeze fresh turmeric root. First, wash and dry the roots, then place them in a freezer-safe bag or container, removing as much air as possible before sealing. Frozen turmeric can last up to six months.

    Storing Turmeric Powder

    To store turmeric powder, keep it in an airtight container made of glass, metal, or ceramic, as these materials help protect the spice from light and moisture.

    Place the container in a dark and dry place like a cupboard or pantry, away from direct sunlight, heat, and humidity. Properly stored turmeric powder can maintain its potency and flavor for up to a year.

    Labeling the container with the date of purchase is also a good idea to keep track of freshness. While turmeric powder doesn't spoil easily, its flavor and color may diminish over time.

    Where Can I Buy Turmeric?

    You can purchase turmeric at local grocery stores, health food stores, online retailers, or ethnic markets. Look for turmeric in the spice aisle or as fresh roots, capsules, and teas.

    Enjoy Using Turmeric In Several Ways!

    Turmeric has a distinct earthy flavor and a mild bitterness. Its taste can vary depending on the type used and how it is prepared, but when used in the right amounts, it can add a pleasant warm flavor to your dishes.

    Whether making healthy carrot fries or indulging in a delicious curry, turmeric can take your meal to the next level with its unique flavor and powerful health benefits. With these recipes in mind, you can explore your culinary creations and experience the unique flavor of turmeric for yourself.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    May 29, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Different vegetables.

    What is a vegetable? Look around in your kitchen or nearby grocery store, and you will likely find yourself surrounded by varieties of colorful, crunchy vegetables. But do you really understand exactly what a vegetable is?

    The answer may surprise you! From the common potato to the exotic kohlrabi, there's much more to veggies than meets the eye. In this article, we will explore what makes something a vegetable and why it's so essential to know more about vegetables.

    What Is A Vegetable?
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Is A Vegetable?

    A vegetable is a type of plant we can eat as food, usually for its tasty parts like leaves, roots, stems, or flowers. Vegetables come in many sizes, shapes, and colors and are essential to a healthy diet because they provide fiber, minerals, and vitamins.

    Some popular vegetables include carrots, broccoli, cauliflower, spinach, and tomatoes. They can be eaten raw, cooked, or blended into delicious smoothies!

    Why Is It Important To Know About Vegetables?

    Understanding the significance of vegetables is crucial today, as they are vital to our overall well-being and sustainability. Vegetables, edible plant-based products, provide essential nutrients and contribute to environmental preservation.

    By being aware of the diverse types of vegetables and their unique properties, we can make informed choices about our diet and foster a healthy lifestyle. Furthermore, incorporating a variety of vegetable matter into our meals supports local agriculture and reduces our carbon footprint.

    What Are Different Types Of Vegetables?

    There are different types of vegetables, each with unique characteristics and benefits. Below are some different categories of vegetables, along with some examples and information about each.

    Root Vegetables

    Root vegetables, also known as root crops, are plants whose roots are the primary edible part. These starchy vegetables are packed with nutrients and are typically high in carbohydrates. Examples of root vegetables include carrots, beets, radishes, and parsnips.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Stem Vegetables

    Stem vegetables are plants whose stems are the main edible part. They can be consumed raw or cooked and are often used in soups. Examples of stem vegetables include celery, asparagus, and fennel.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Leafy Vegetables

    Leafy greens, also known as leafy vegetables, are vegetables with large, edible leaves. They are considered the most nutritious green vegetables and can also be eaten uncooked (in salads) or in various dishes. Examples of leafy greens include spinach, kale, and collard greens.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Cruciferous Vegetables

    Cruciferous vegetables are a part of the Brassica family and are known for their unique and sometimes pungent flavor. These vegetables are highly rich in vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. Examples of cruciferous vegetables include white and purple cauliflower, broccoli, and Brussels sprouts.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Fruit Vegetables

    Fruit vegetables are the edible parts of seed plants that are usually consumed as vegetables but are technically fruits. These vegetables are typically high in vitamins C, and K. Examples of fruit vegetables include tomatoes, peppers, and eggplants.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Beans And Legumes

    Beans and legumes are plant seeds in the Fabaceae family. They are rich in protein, fiber, and various vitamins and minerals. Examples include kidney beans, green beans, peas, lentils, and black-eyed peas.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Nightshade Vegetables

    Nightshade vegetables belong to the Solanaceae family and are native to South America, India, Pakistan, and some other countries. They are rich in minerals and vitamins, but some people may be sensitive to their alkaloid content.

    Examples of nightshade vegetables include potatoes, tomatoes, and eggplants.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Cucurbits

    Cucurbits are plants in the gourd family typically grown in temperate climates. They are high in water content and are primarily used in salads and other dishes. Examples of cucurbits include cucumbers, zucchini, and squash.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Tubers

    Tubers are the swollen underground stems or roots of plants that store nutrients for the plant. They are often high in carbohydrates and are a good energy source. Examples of tubers include sweet potatoes, yams, and regular potatoes.

    What Is A Vegetable?

    Differences Between Fruits And Vegetables

    Fruits differ in several ways, such as botanical classification, taste, nutritional content, and seed presence. Here are the key differences between fruits and vegetables:

    1. Botanical Classification

    • Fruit: In botanical terms, a fruit is the mature ovary of a flowering plant that typically contains seeds. Fruits develop from the fertilized ovules of flowers and serve to disperse seeds for plant reproduction. Examples include apples, bananas, grapes, and oranges.
    • Vegetable: Vegetables are any edible parts of plants that do not fall under the fruit category. These can include leaves (lettuce, spinach), stems (celery, asparagus), roots (carrots, beets), flowers (broccoli, cauliflower), and even seeds (corn, peas). Some vegetables, like tomatoes, cucumbers, and peppers, are technically fruits but are considered vegetables due to their taste and culinary use.

    2. Taste

    • Fruit: Most fruits have a sweet or tart taste, as they contain natural sugars such as fructose. This sweetness is often what makes them appealing as snacks or dessert items.
    • Vegetable: Most vegetables have a more savory flavor profile, ranging from bitter to earthy. They are typically used in main dishes, side dishes, and salads.

    3. Nutritional Content

    • Fruit: Fruits are rich in vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants, particularly vitamin C, potassium, and folate. They also provide dietary fiber, which aids digestion. However, due to their naturally higher sugar content, fruits should be consumed in moderation, especially for those watching their sugar intake.
    • Vegetable: Vegetables offer many nutrients, including vitamins A, C, and K, iron, calcium, and potassium. They are generally lower in calories and natural sugar than fruits. Many vegetables are also rich in phytonutrients, which reduce the risk of chronic diseases.

    4. Seed Presence

    • Fruit: As mentioned earlier, most fruits typically contain seeds, which can be found within the fruit itself (e.g., apples, watermelon) or on the outer surface (e.g., strawberries). Some fruits have a single seed (e.g., peach), while others have multiple seeds (e.g., pomegranate).
    • Vegetable: Most vegetables do not contain seeds, except when used as a culinary vegetable (e.g., tomatoes, cucumbers, and peppers). In these cases, they are classified as vegetables due to their taste and culinary use, even though they are technically fruits in botanical terms. Corn kernels are considered seeds of such a plant but fall under the vegetable category for culinary purposes.

    In conclusion, while both fruits and vegetables are vital for maintaining a balanced diet, they differ in taste, nutritional content, and botanical classification.

    What Is The Ideal Method For Cooking Vegetables To Preserve Their Nutrients?

    The ideal way to cook vegetables to retain their nutrients is by using methods that minimize heat exposure, water usage, and cooking time. This helps preserve the minerals and vitamins in cooked vegetables, ensuring that your vegetable consumption remains a healthy and nutrient-rich part of your main course.

    1. Steaming: Steaming preserves most nutrients in vegetables due to its gentle cooking approach. It involves placing the vegetables in a steamer basket over boiling water, allowing the steam to cook them without direct contact with the water. Check out this article for Instant Pot vegetables!
    2. Microwaving: Microwaving is an efficient way to cook vegetables while preserving their nutrients. Since it uses less water and shorter cooking times, microwaving can help maintain the nutritional value of your food. Just be sure to avoid overcooking.
    3. Stir-Frying: Stir-frying is another excellent method for retaining nutrients in vegetables. It involves cooking them quickly over high heat with a small amount of oil. This method retains the vegetables' texture, color, and nutritional value.
    4. Grilling Or Roasting: Grilling or roasting vegetables at a high temperature for a short period can help preserve their nutrients. These methods also enhance the flavor and provide an appealing texture. Be sure to use minimal oil to keep the dish healthy.
    5. Eating Raw: Some vegetables, such as leafy greens, bell peppers, and tomatoes, can be eaten raw to maximize their nutritional content. Including a variety of raw vegetables in your diet ensures that you're getting the full range of nutrients they offer.

    Which Vegetables Can You Grow At Home?

    Growing your own vegetables is not only an enjoyable hobby, but it also helps you save money and eat healthier. You can easily grow many vegetables at home, even with limited space. Here are some popular options, including sweet potatoes:

    1. Sweet Potatoes - These nutritious, versatile tubers thrive in warm climates and can be grown in containers or directly in the ground. Sweet potato requires well-drained soil and plenty of sunlight. Be patient, as they typically take around 3-4 months to mature.
    2. Tomatoes - With numerous varieties to choose from, tomatoes are a popular choice for home gardens. They can be grown in pots, containers, or directly in the ground. Be sure to provide support for the plants and give them plenty of sunlight.
    3. Lettuce - Lettuce is one of the most easiest vegetables to grow. It is an excellent vegetable for beginners and can be grown in either containers or garden beds. Choose from various types, such as romaine, butterhead, or leaf lettuce. Pluck the outer leaves when necessary, allowing the plant to continue growing.
    4. Carrots - This root vegetable can easily grow in loose, well-drained soil. Carrots can be directly planted in the ground or in deep containers. Regularly water and thin out seedlings to give them enough room to grow.
    5. Peppers - Both sweet and hot peppers are great options for home gardens. Depending on available space, they can be grown in containers or in the ground. Peppers need warmth and sunlight, so be sure to choose a sunny spot.
    6. Cucumbers - Perfect for salads and pickling, cucumbers are a versatile addition to any garden. They can be grown in containers or garden beds, but make sure to provide a trellis or support for the vines to climb.
    7. Radishes - With a short growing season, radishes are an excellent choice for impatient gardeners. They can be cultivated in containers or directly in the soil and harvested within a matter of weeks.
    8. Green Beans - Both bush and pole bean varieties can be successfully grown at home. Green beans are easier to grow and can be grown in containers or garden beds. Provide support for pole beans, as they will need something to climb.
    9. Zucchini - This prolific summer squash is simple to grow and can produce an abundant harvest. Zucchini plants can be planted in containers or garden beds, but give them plenty of space, as they tend to spread out.
    10. Kale - Nutrient-dense and versatile, kale is popular for home gardeners. It can be grown in containers or garden beds and prefers cooler temperatures. Pluck the leaves as needed, starting with the outermost ones.

    And don't forget to make some vegetable markers for when you plant your veggies.

    veggie markers

    Environmental Benefits Of Eating Vegetables

    Did you know that consuming vegetables positively impacts the environment every time you eat them? Adding more greens to your plate reduces your carbon footprint and supports sustainable agriculture.

    Vegetables require significantly fewer resources (such as water and fossil fuels) to grow and transport than animal-based foods. Additionally, many non-organic meat and dairy products contribute to deforestation and water pollution.

    Eating more vegetables can help decrease your environmental impact and help you live a more sustainable lifestyle.

    Is Tomato A Vegetable Or Fruit?

    Tomato is often considered a vegetable in culinary contexts, but it is actually a fruit from a botanical standpoint. As a seed plant, tomatoes develop from a flower's ovary and contain seeds, classifying them as a fruit.

    However, from a culinary standpoint, due to their sweet flavor, savory taste, and usage in various dishes, people commonly refer to them as vegetables.

    The Supreme Court of the USA had also made a decision called "Nix v. Hedden, 149 U.S. 304", in which it decided that tomato should be treated as a vegetable.

    Is A Cucumber A Fruit?

    Yes, a cucumber is a fruit. It develops from the flower's ovary and contains seeds. Botanically, it falls under the fruit category, although it is commonly treated as a vegetable in culinary contexts.

    So What Is A Vegetable Actually? Final Thoughts

    In conclusion, vegetables are a great way to eat healthily and positively impact the environment. For chefs and gardeners, it's essential to understand the distinction between a vegetable and a fruit. For example, tomatoes and cucumbers are fruits, but we often refer to them as vegetables.

    From carrots and peppers to kale and zucchini, there are so many options for home gardeners to choose from. With the essential supplies and a little bit of knowledge, anyone can start their own vegetable garden and enjoy the benefits!

    So, add some veggies to your diet, no matter what your taste buds tell you. Learn how to cut butternut squash here!

    Healthy Thanksgiving Side Dishes

    May 28, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Do you have a favorite side dish for the thanksgiving table? We sure do. In fact, I there are lots of thanksgiving side dishes we love to make each year and it's one of my favorite family meals.

    In case you’re looking for some new fun & creative Thanksgiving side dish ideas, check out some of these Thanksgiving recipes that would be perfect to sit next to your turkey! Which thanksgiving side will you enjoy?

    thanksgiving side dishes
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Best Thanksgiving Sides

    So you're looking for the best thanksgiving sides that are healthy and tasty! Here are some delicious options that will be sure to please everyone at the table!

    Easy Thanksgiving Sides You Will Love

    Purple Cauliflower Mash!

    This is a great way to get some extra veggies on the table! Roast up some purple cauliflower and mash it with olive oil, garlic, nutritional yeast (or Parmesan cheese if you’re not vegan/vegetarian), and salt and pepper. Yummy!

    Get the recipe for Purple Cauliflower Mash here!

    Purple Cauliflower Recipe

    Cauliflower Gratin

    This is a low-carb twist on the classic potatoes gratin. It’s made with roasted cauliflower, cream, cheese, and spices. Delicious! You'll love this thanksgiving side dish and the fact that it's healthy!

    Get the recipe for cauliflower gratin here!

    Rosemary Roasted Fingerling Potatoes

    Fingerling potatoes are small and cute, but they pack a lot of flavor! Roast them with rosemary, olive oil, salt, and pepper for an easy and tasty side dish that will go perfectly with your turkey.

    Get the recipe for rosemary roasted fingerling potatoes here!

    Healthy Spaghetti Squash

    Spaghetti squash is a great way to get some extra veggies on your plate. Roast it, then toss it in a mixture of melted butter, lemon juice, Parmesan cheese, garlic, and parsley for a delicious side dish!

    Get the recipe for spaghetti squash with lemon and Parmesan here. It's one of my favorite Thanksgiving side dish recipes.

    spaghetti Squash

    Butternut Squash Soup

    This is a creamy, hearty soup that’s perfect for chilly fall days. Roast some butternut squash, then blend it with vegetable broth and spices for a healthy and delicious side dish.

    Get the recipe for butternut squash soup here!

    Citrus Honey Roasted Beets

    Beets are a great veggie to add to your Thanksgiving menu. Roast them with citrus and honey for a sweet and colorful side dish that everyone will love!

    Get the recipe for citrus honey roasted beets here!

    citrus and honey roasted beets

    Mashed Sweet Potatoes

    Mashed sweet potatoes are a classic, comforting side dish that everyone will love. You can add cinnamon, nutmeg, or brown sugar for an extra flavor kick.

    Get the recipe for mashed sweet potatoes here!

    Brussel Sprouts With Bacon

    Roasted Brussel sprouts are a classic Thanksgiving side dish, and they’re even better when paired with bacon! This recipe is easy to make and sure to be a hit at your table.

    Get the recipe for brussel sprouts with bacon here! Eat roasted brussels sprouts as part of your thanksgiving menu today! Add a drizle of maple syrup for extra flavor.

    bacon brussel sprouts

    Mashed Potatoes

    Mashed potatoes are a Thanksgiving staple. This version is made with roasted garlic and butter for an extra flavor kick!

    Get the recipe for garlic mashed potatoes here!

    Air Fryer Asparagus With Parmesan Cheese

    Asparagus is a great vegetable to add to your Thanksgiving feast. Roast it with bacon and goat cheese and tip with toasted almonds for a flavorful side dish that everyone will love!

    Get the recipe for Air Fryer Asparagus here!

    air fryer asparagus

    Green Bean Casserole

    Of course, you can’t forget the classic green bean casserole! This recipe features fresh green beans and a creamy mushroom sauce.

    Get the recipe for green bean casserole here!

    Baby Turnips With Butter & Carraway Seeds

    Baby turnips are a sweet and tasty veggie that pairs perfectly with the rest of your Thanksgiving sides. Roast them with butter and caraway seeds for a simple yet flavorful side dish.

    Get the recipe for baby turnips with butter & caraway seeds here!

    Air Fryer Baby Carrots With Sage

    Air fryer carrots are a great way to get your veggies into the mix. Seasoned with sage, honey, and lemon juice, they make for a flavorful side dish that will be sure to please everyone at the table!

    Get the recipe for air fryer baby carrots with sage & honey here!

    air fryer roasted baby carrots

    Roasted Sweet Potatoes

    This delicious side dish is the perfect thanksgiving side to enjoy with your turkey. Sweet Potatoes are roasted and served with sour cream and fresh herbs! Yum!

    Get the recipe for roasted sweet potatoes here!

    Cranberry Sauce

    This homemade cranberry sauce is the perfect accompaniment to your Thanksgiving feast. With just a few simple ingredients you can make this delicious sauce that will be sure to please!

    Get the recipe for Instant Pot Cranberry Sauce here! This is one of the best thanksgiving side dishes! You can also try our Orange Cranberry Sauce recipe here!

    Healthy Thanksgiving Side Dishes Cranberry Sauce.

    Easy Potato Salad

    If you're not in the mood for creamy mashed potatoes then why not try making a easy potato salad or sweet potato salad. Potato salad is tasty, delicious and also goes well with turkey the next day!

    You can make potato salad using this great recipe! Grab the fresh thyme and enjoy this tasty dish with a dash of balsamic vinegar.

    Healthy Thanksgiving Side Dishes.

    Roasted Butternut Squash

    If you want a great side for thanksgiving dinner then try this roasted butternut squash recipe. It's great for the holiday table and pairs well with turkey, veg and mashed potatoes.

    Get the recipe for roasted butternut squash here and you can use it to make mashed butternut squash too! Perfect for the thanksgiving table.

    Potato Au Gratin

    Grab the fresh herbs and get ready to make Potato au gratin for your holiday meal. Potatoes au gratin is one of those side dishes I can eat any time of the year but it tastes fantastic with Turkey on the Thanksgiving table.

    Learn how to make creamy potato au gratin for your Thanksgiving meal here.

    Sweet Potato Casserole

    Sweet potato casseroles are the best side dish to make for Thanksgiving. This recipe is bursting with flavor and will be loved by everyone at your table!

    Get the recipe for sweet potato casserole here! Enjoy this delicious thanksgiving treat today!

    Corn Bread Stuffing

    You can’t have Thanksgiving without some stuffing . This cornbread stuffing is made with butter, sage, mushrooms, celery and salty bacon – it’s a must-have side dish!

    Learn how to make corn bread stuffing today!

    Enjoy Thanksgiving Sides This Holiday Season

    These are just a few of the delicious and healthy side dishes you can make for Thanksgiving. With these recipes, you’ll be sure to impress your guests with a tasty meal that’s full of veggies!

    Happy holidays! If you need a tasty and simple dessert for Thanksgiving check out our Fruit Cobbler...It's gluten free!

    The Best Food For Healthy Skin

    May 28, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Foods for skin care.

    Are you looking for an easy way to get beautiful, healthy skin? Well, look no further than your own kitchen! Eating certain foods can help promote glowing, youthful-looking skin and even protect it from damage.

    In this article, we'll explore the power of food to boost skin health and give you that perfect glow. Read on for the best food for healthy skin.

    best foods for healthy skin.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Best Food For Healthy Skin

    We'll discuss what ingredients are essential for a diet tailored towards healthy skin, how it work magic on our cells and molecules, as well as share some simple ideas for adding this type of food into your meals. So if you're ready to invest in gorgeous glowing skin read on!

    Fruits And Vegetables For Healthy Skin

    Eat plenty of fruits and vegetables for their vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants.

    Eating plenty of fruits and vegetables not only satisfies our palate but also provides vital nutrients that keep our bodies healthy and functioning properly.

    The colorful array of produce offers a diverse range of vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants that can help ward off chronic diseases and support overall well-being.

    Vegetables To Eat To Protect Skin

    Some of the most powerful skin-protecting vegetables include broccoli, cauliflower, kale, Brussels sprouts, sweet potatoes, spinach, and carrots.

    These are rich in vitamins, such as vitamin A, which helps prevent sun damage, and Vitamin C, which aids in collagen formation and protects against free radicals.

    Carrots also have beta-carotene, which helps block UV rays from damaging the skin.

    Fruits To Eat For Healthy Skin

    Fruits like blueberries, strawberries, oranges, kiwis, and papayas contain a high amount of antioxidants that fight the oxidative damage that skin cells face from exposure to the sun.

    Eating these regularly can help decrease wrinkles, dark spots, and age lines and give you an overall glow, which helps maintain healthy skin.

    So next time you are planning a meal or reaching for a snack, remember the abundance of benefits that come from choosing nature's colorful bounty.

    Eat Healthy Fats For Good Skin

    Healthy fats are essential for your body to function properly. Incorporating healthy fat foods such as olive oil, avocados and nuts into your diet can have a significant impact on your overall health.

    Avocados are rich in monounsaturated fatty acids, which can help lower bad cholesterol levels. According to research from 2011, avocados also protect your skin from UV rays. Nuts are a great source of vitamin E and are great for dry skin and sun exposure.

    best foods for healthy skin

    Eat Protein For Good Skin

    Protein is an essential macronutrient that plays a critical role in maintaining and building muscle, repairing tissues, and boosting your metabolism.

    If you're looking to add more of this muscle-building nutrient to your diet, it's important to choose protein sources that are both lean and nutritious.

    Chicken And Fish For Good Skin Health

    Chicken and fish are excellent choices because they not only provide a high-quality protein, but they are also low in saturated fats.

    Fish contains essential fatty acids which can help with wound healing and skin health.

    By adding these lean proteins to your diet, you can help keep your skin looking healthy and glowing for years to come.

    Grains For Healthy Skin

    Brown rice and quinoa are two excellent examples of whole grains that provide many health benefits, including the prevention of skin damage.

    Grains Contain Fiber For Good Skin Health

    Grains are rich in fiber, which can help the skin as well, as it helps to eliminate toxins from the body which effect the skin.

    best foods for healthy skin grains

    Drink Water For Good Skin

    Drink plenty of water to stay hydrated throughout the day.

    We've all heard it before: drink plenty of water to stay hydrated. But do you know why it's so important? Water is essential to keeping our bodies functioning properly.

    Water helps regulate our body temperature, supports healthy digestion, and even improves cognitive function. When we don't drink enough water, we can experience headaches and fatigue.

    So how much water should we be drinking?

    The general rule of thumb is to aim for eight glasses of water per day. However, everyone's needs may differ depending on factors like activity level and climate.

    The key is to listen to your body and make sure you're drinking enough water to stay hydrated throughout the day. So go ahead and take a sip – your body will thank you!

    Green Tea

    Drink green tea for its antioxidant and anti-inflammatory properties.

    Green tea is one of the healthiest beverages you can drink. And it also has incredible benefits for skin health! The antioxidants found in green tea can help reduce cell damage and inflammation that can lead to wrinkles, redness, and other signs of aging. And its anti-inflammatory properties can soothe irritated skin.

    Eat Beans And Zinc Rich Foods For Good Skin

    Incorporate foods high in zinc like beans, oysters, and lentils into your diet.

    If you're feeling run down lately, it might be time to add some zinc into your diet.

    This important mineral plays a crucial role in maintaining a healthy immune system. Luckily, these foods are all easy to incorporate into your daily meals.

    Try adding a can of black beans to your salad for a protein and zinc boost, or enjoy a delicious oyster appetizer next time you're out for dinner.

    You can also experiment with lentils by making a tasty vegetarian chili or adding them to a stir fry. With these tasty options, there's no excuse for missing out on the benefits of zinc.

    Eat A Balanced Diet For Good Skin

    Eating a balanced diet filled with colorful fruits, vegetables, and healthy fats is key to having beautiful skin.

    By eating plenty of vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and proteins found in whole grains and lean meats such as chicken and fish you can help your skin stay healthy and radiant.

    Additionally, zinc-rich foods such as beans, lentils, and oysters are essential for maintaining youthful looking skin.

    Lastly but most importantly of all - don’t forget to drink plenty of water – being hydrated will give skin the boost it needs to look its best.

    So put these tips into action to help guard your skin against environmental damage which unfortunately comes our way - with a healthy eating plan you’ll be able to show off your beautiful glowing skin!

    Read all about healthy travel snacks here!

    Breakfast Taco Recipe with Harissa Lime Sour Cream

    May 28, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream.

    Wake up your taste buds with these Breakfast Tacos—loaded with flavor, quick to make, and anything but boring. With spicy harissa lime sour cream and roasted peppers wrapped in plantain tortillas, this breakfast taco recipe is a real winner!

    Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream.

    hese breakfast tacos are perfect year-round but shine during spring and summer when you're craving something bold, light, and energizing. They’re also a great meal prep idea for busy mornings or brunch with a twist.

    If you love vibrant flavors, pair this recipe with my Strawberry Jalapeno Salsa or Vegan Avocado Toast.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Ready in 20 minutes: Perfect for busy weekday mornings.
    • Packed with flavor: Harissa, lime, and sweet peppers wake up your taste buds.
    • Naturally gluten-free: Thanks to the homemade plantain tortillas.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    Harissa sour cream ingredients.
    • Plantain Tortillas: Provide a unique, slightly sweet base for the tacos. Try these Plantain Tortillas.
    • Green Harissa Paste: Bold and aromatic, it adds the perfect kick when mixed into sour cream.
    • Roasted Mini Sweet Peppers: These add a subtle smoky sweetness that balances the heat.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Spicy: Add chili flakes or hot sauce to the sour cream.
    • Dairy-Free: Use coconut yogurt or a vegan sour cream alternative.
    • Vegan: Replace eggs with scrambled tofu.
    • Earthy: Add toasted caraway or cumin seeds to the tortilla or sour cream.
    • Umami Boost: Mix in a touch of tomato paste or smoked paprika for richness.

    Craving more creative breakfast ideas? Check out my Tofu Stir Fry Noodles or Instant Pot Shrimp Scampi for unique flavor twists.

    🔪 How To Make This Breakfast Taco Recipe with Harissa Lime Sour Cream

    Here's a step-by-step guide on how to make easy breakfast Tacos. First, you’ll wanna whip up a batch of the Harissa Lime Sour Cream.

    Harissa for making sour cream.
    1. Step 1: Combine the organic, grass-fed sour cream with the green Harissa paste from Mina, lime & salt. I like to toss some cilantro on top for color too.
    Harissa for making sour cream.
    1. Step 2: Next, roast some mini sweet peppers on high heat for about 20 minutes. Roast on a baking sheet at about 400°F for 20 minutes. These peppers can be stored in your fridge & used for anything from snacking to salads.
    Breakfast tacos with harissa sour cream.
    1. Step 3: Fry or scramble your eggs. Plate your breakfast tacos with a Plantain Tortilla, egg, peppers & the Harissa Lime Sour Cream. Top with an extra squeeze of fresh lime & cilantro. Your Breakfast tacos are now ready to cook.

    💡 Hint: Want extra protein? Add black beans or leftover grilled chicken to the filling.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • Roast peppers in advance to save time during busy mornings.
    • Warm tortillas in a skillet or microwave before serving to prevent cracking.
    • Balance heat by adjusting the amount of harissa or adding a touch of honey to the sour cream.

    💭 FAQs

    Can I use store-bought tortillas?

    Yes, but homemade plantain tortillas are naturally gluten-free and add great texture.

    Is harissa too spicy for breakfast?

    Not at all! When mixed with sour cream and lime, it becomes a flavorful and balanced sauce.

    How do I store leftover breakfast tacos?

    Keep components separate. Store the sour cream in an airtight container and reheat the tortillas and eggs as needed.

    Can I make these vegetarian or vegan?

    Absolutely! Use tofu instead of eggs and dairy-free sour cream.

    What are good toppings for breakfast tacos?

    Try avocado slices, fresh salsa, pickled onions, or a sprinkle of cotija cheese.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    These are my favorite side dishes to serve with breakfast tacos with harissa lime sour cream:

    • Strawberry Mojito Mocktail: Refreshing and light—perfect with the spices.
    • Sweet Potato Hash: Adds fiber and warmth for a more filling breakfast.
    • Pineapple Slaw: Crisp and juicy, this balances out the smoky harissa.
    • Cucumber Lime Salad: Fresh, hydrating, and quick to throw together.
    Two plates of tacos with harissa sour cream.

    🍽 Try These Tasty Soup Recipes

    • Broccoli Soup With Feta Cheese.
      Creamy Broccoli Soup With Feta Cheese
    • Zesty Cabbage Soup in a white bowl.
      Zesty Cabbage Soup (With Lemon & Herbs – One Pot Wonder!)
    • French Onion Soup With Cheesy Baguette Slices.
      French Onion Soup With Cheesy Baguette Slices
    • Instant Pot Chinese Dumpling Soup.
      Best Chinese Dumpling Soup (Instant Pot Recipe)

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save?

    Breakfast Tacos With Harissa Lime Sour Cream.

    Best Breakfast Taco Recipe With Harissa Lime Sour Cream

    Angela Milnes
    Kickstart your day with these flavorful Breakfast Tacos with Harissa Lime Sour Cream! These tacos bring the perfect balance of spice and tang to your morning.
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 2 Servings
    Calories 234 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 Plaintain Tortillas
    • 2 Eggs
    • 1 tablespoon Fresh Cilantro
    • 4 Sweet Mini Peppers
    • 1 tablespoon Green Harissa
    • 4 tablespoon Sour Cream
    • 1 Lime Jucied
    • 1 Teaspoon Salt

    Instructions
     

    • Combine the organic, grass-fed sour cream with the green Harissa paste from Mina, lime & salt. I like to toss some cilantro on top for color too.
    • Next roast some mini sweet peppers on high heat for about 20 minutes. Roast on a baking sheet at about 400 F for 20 minutes.
    • These peppers can be stored in your fridge & used for anything from snacking to salads.
    • Fry or scramble your eggs. Plate your breakfast tacos with a Plantain Tortilla, egg, peppers & the Harissa Lime Sour Cream.
    • Top with an extra squeeze of fresh lime & cilantro. Your Breakfast tacos are now ready to cook.

    Notes

    Keep Your Tortillas Warm: Wrap your warm tortillas in a towel or foil to keep them warm while you prepare the fillings.
    Balance Your Flavors: If your tacos taste too spicy, add more sour cream or a pinch of sugar to balance it out.
    Peppers: The roasted peppers can be stored in your fridge & used for anything from snacking to salads.
    Add More: I like pairing this with a lightly spiced black bean & quinoa salad for a delicious, well rounded meal. Enjoy!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 234kcalCarbohydrates: 25gProtein: 10gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 178mgSodium: 1557mgPotassium: 310mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 2222IUVitamin C: 83mgCalcium: 110mgIron: 2mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler Recipe

    May 28, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Cherry Cobbler Gluten Free.

    Indulge in the delightful fusion of sweet and tart with our Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler, a tantalizing twist on the classic dessert. Bursting with juicy cherries nestled beneath a golden, cakey topping, this delightful treat promises a symphony of flavors in every bite.

    Cherry Cobbler Gluten Free.

    When I first started gluten-free baking, cobblers were one of the trickiest recipes to get right. The goal, a soft, biscuit-style topping that holds its shape, without the grainy or gummy texture some blends can bring. After testing countless flours, fruit combinations, and topping techniques, this version finally nailed it. Whether you're using sweet cherries, peaches, or a berry medley, the topping bakes up golden and fluffy every time.

    And yes—this gluten free cherry fruit cobbler is every bit as comforting as the traditional kind, just without the wheat.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Gluten-Free Adaptability: This easy fruit cobbler recipe uses gluten-free flour, making it perfect for anyone with gluten sensitivities or celiac disease.
    • Fruit Versatility: It lets you use different fruits, so you can pick your favorites or what's in season.
    • Texture Contrast: The combination of a juicy fruit filling and a crispy topping gives a satisfying mix of textures.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    • Cherries or Mixed Berries: I love using cherries or a blueberry blend. They offer the right balance of sweetness and tartness for that juicy cobbler base.
    • Tapioca Flour: This is my go-to thickener. It keeps the fruit filling glossy and cohesive without getting too stiff or gluey.
    • Gluten-Free Flour Blend: I’ve tested this with both Bob’s Red Mill All-Purpose (bean-based) and 1-to-1 (rice-based) blends. Each works—just with slightly different textures (see my flour breakdown below).

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Apple Cinnamon Cobbler: Use tart apples and add a dash of cinnamon for a cozy fall dessert.
    • Peach Cobbler with Almond Topping: Sub half the flour for almond meal for a nutty, golden crust.
    • Mixed Berry Cobbler: Use a combo of blueberries, strawberries, raspberries, and blackberries.
    • Vegan-Friendly: Use coconut oil or vegan butter, almond milk, and a flax egg.
    • Refined Sugar-Free: Replace white sugar with coconut sugar or maple syrup.
    • Grain-Free Version: Use almond flour and arrowroot starch for a paleo-style topping.

    🔪 How To Make Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler?

    1. Cook the fruit: In a saucepan, combine fruit (like cherries or blueberries), sugar, lemon juice, tapioca flour, and water. Simmer for 15 minutes until thickened.
    2. Preheat the oven: Set it to 375°F. Pour the thickened fruit mixture into a 3.5-quart casserole dish.
    3. Make the topping: In a bowl, mix gluten-free flour, baking powder, sugar, butter, egg, and milk. You can spoon it over in dollops or gently spread it with wet fingers.
    4. Bake: Bake uncovered for 30 minutes until the topping is golden brown and slightly crisp.
    5. Cool slightly and serve: Let it sit for 5 minutes. Serve warm with vanilla ice cream or whipped cream.
    Best Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler Recipe.

    💡Hint: If your topping dough is sticky, wet your hands or use a spatula to gently flatten it. It doesn’t need to cover the entire surface.

    gluten free fruit cobbler with a spoon.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • Test your flour: Bob’s Red Mill 1-to-1 has the best flavor, while the All-Purpose GF (blue label) offers better structure but a faint bean taste. Pick based on your preference.
    • Use cold butter: It helps form little pockets of steam for a fluffy, tender crust.
    • Bake uncovered: Don’t be tempted to cover with foil—the topping needs exposure to crisp up properly.

    💭 FAQs

    Which gluten free flour works best?

    I use Bob's red Mill All-Purpose gluten free baking flour. Here are the pro's and con's of the Blue label Flour:

    This flour won in the texture department. It definitely holds together much better isn’t painfully sticky. It’s pretty easy to simply pour this on top of your cobbler, spread it out a bit with a spatula. It tastes like beans (probably only to me).

    This flour is made from garbanzo fava beans ingredients: garbanzo bean flour, potato starch, tapioca flour, whole grain sweet white sorghum flour, fava bean flour.

    The flour tastes strongly of raw beans when uncooked, but the bean flavor diminishes after cooking, though a hint may linger. Since you won't eat the cobbler topping raw, if it doesn't taste beany to you and you're fine with occasional beans, choose this flour for the cobbler's texture.

    Can I use frozen fruit?

    Yes! No need to thaw. Just add a few extra minutes to the simmering time so the filling thickens properly.

    Is this cobbler paleo?

    Not quite—but you can make a grain-free version by using almond flour, arrowroot starch, and coconut sugar.

    Can I make this in a cast iron skillet?

    Definitely. Just make sure your skillet is oven-safe and preheated before adding the filling for extra crisp edges.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    Serve this gluten free cherry cobbler with:

    • Vanilla Ice Cream: Classic pairing—especially when warm.
    • Whipped Coconut Cream: Perfect dairy-free alternative.
    • Fresh Berries: A bright topping for extra fruitiness.
    • Mint Leaves: For a fresh pop of color and contrast.
    • Caramel Sauce: Drizzle over the top for a richer dessert.
    Cherry Cobbler Gluten Free.

    🍽 Try These Tasty Desserts

    • The Best No Bake Banana Pudding.
      The Best No Bake Banana Pudding
    • White Chocolate Raspberry Mousse in Glasses.
      White Chocolate Raspberry Mousse in Glasses
    • Peach Pie Bars.
      Homemade Peach Pie Bars – Sweet, Simple, and So Good!
    • Tropical Papaya Berry Bircher With Chia Seeds.
      Tropical Papaya Berry Bircher With Chia Seeds

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Cherry Cobbler Gluten Free.

    Gluten Free Fruit Cobbler

    Angela Milnes
    Savor the sweet comfort of Gluten-Free Fruit Cobbler! This delightful dessert features juicy, fresh cherries topped with a golden, crumbly cobbler topping, all made without gluten.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Desserts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 5 Servings
    Calories 403 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Cobbler Ingredients

    • 4 cups Cherries Or Other Fruit
    • ¼ cup Sugar
    • 1 Lemon Juiced
    • 1 tablespoon Tapioca Flour
    • 1 Cup Water

    Cobbler Topping

    • 1 cup Gluten Free Flour
    • ¼ cup Sugar
    • 1 teaspoon Baking Powder
    • 5 tablespoon Butter
    • 1 Egg
    • 3 Tablespoons Milk Any milk: Coconut, Almond, etc

    Instructions
     

    • Place fruit, sugar, lemon juice, tapioca flour & water into a sauce pot. Bring to a boil & let simmer until some of the liquid is gone. About 15 minutes.
    • Preheat oven to 375.
    • Once filling has reduced in liquid a bit, pour into a small casserole dish. Mine holds 3.5 Qts. Dimensions 14.5 x 9.5 x 3.
    • In a medium sized bowl, make the filling.
    • Mix together gluten free flour, sugar, baking powder, butter, egg & milk until all ingredients are combine. Depending on which flour you’ve used you’ll either be able to pour your batter in like a cake batter or you can place it on top of the filling in scoops & try & spread it out with wet hands or a spatula.
    • Cobbler topping does not need to touch the side of the baking dish.
    • Place in the preheated oven & bake for 30 minutes.
    • Remove from oven & allow to cool for a few minutes.
    • Serve still warm with ice cream!

    Notes

    This recipe uses cherries, but you can add any fresh fruit you fancy or use whatever fruit is in season. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 403kcalCarbohydrates: 70gProtein: 6gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.5gCholesterol: 64mgSodium: 195mgPotassium: 373mgFiber: 6gSugar: 49gVitamin A: 2619IUVitamin C: 74mgCalcium: 106mgIron: 1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    Best Plantain Tortillas Recipe

    May 28, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Plantain Tortillas on a blue teatowel.

    Picture this, ripe plantains transformed into soft, pliable Plantain Tortillas that add a subtle sweetness to every bite. They're not just delicious; they're a game-changer for anyone looking to explore new flavors in the kitchen.

    Plantain Tortillas on a blue teatowel.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why This Recipe Works

    • Gluten-Free Option: Plantain tortillas are naturally gluten-free, making them a great alternative for those with gluten sensitivities or celiac disease.
    • Unique Flavor: Enjoy the slightly sweet and nutty flavor of plantains, which adds a distinct taste to your dishes compared to traditional tortillas.
    • Easy to Make: With just a few simple ingredients, plantain tortillas are easy to prepare at home, allowing you to customize them to your taste preferences.

    Need a delicious idea for these Plantain Tortillas? Check out these Breakfast Tacos with Harissa Lime Sour Cream!

    🥘 Ingredients

    Plantain in a bowl.
    • Plantains: Act as the primary ingredient, giving the tortillas a unique, subtly sweet base.
    • Egg: Binds the ingredients together and contributes to the tortilla's structure.
    • Coconut Oil: Adds a touch of tropical flavor and aids in creating a soft texture.
    • Salt: Enhances the natural flavors of the plantains and balances sweetness.
    • Water: With this ingredient, plantain tortillas are pliable and easier to shape, aiding in the creation of perfectly thin and flexible tortillas.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Plantain Flour Tortilla: For convenience, use plantain flour instead of whole plantains. This alternative offers a simpler preparation method and can be easily pressed using a tortilla press for consistent results.
    • Oil Substitution: An alternative to using oil in your plantain mixture for Plantain Tortilla recipe is to opt for avocado oil or olive oil, adding a unique flavor profile to the tortillas.

    🔪 How To Make Plantain Tortillas?

    Blending mixture of plantain tortillas in a food processor.

    Step One: Place all your ingredients except the water in a high-powered blender or food processor. Slowly pour in the water as the mixture comes together, blending until it resembles batter.

    Making tortillas shapes from portions of mixture.

    Step Two: Use a Cookie Scoop to portion out the batter into round tortilla shapes, ensuring uniform size for each tortilla. Shape the tortillas to be thin, aiding in the bubbling up and crisping during cooking.

    Tortillas shaped mixture ready to be cooked.

    Step Three: Place the shaped tortillas on two cookie sheets, with about 4 tortillas per sheet, each around 4-5 inches across. Bake the tortillas in the oven at 425°F for 10 minutes, then flip them and bake for an additional 7-10 minutes.

    Tortilla mixture ready to be cooked.

    Step Four: Watch closely during the last few minutes of cooking to prevent burning, especially if the tortillas are thin, as they can quickly become overdone. Once ready, enjoy your freshly baked plantain tortillas as a delicious and versatile alternative to traditional tortillas. Fill them with your favorite ingredients and savor the unique flavors!

    Hint: If reheating, warm the tortillas in a cast iron skillet over medium heat or microwave them briefly until heated through before serving.

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    If you're going to make homemade tortillas, make sure to follow these top tips!

    • Control Thickness: Adjust the thickness of the tortilla batter based on personal preference; thinner tortillas crisp up more for a crunchy texture, while thicker ones are softer.
    • Use Parchment Paper: Use parchment lined baking sheet to prevent sticking and facilitate easy removal of the cooked tortillas, ensuring they maintain their shape.

    💭 FAQs

    How Many Plantains For Tortillas?

    I use 3 plantains. I kinda prefer yellow plantains over green plantains but that’s just because it makes em a tad easier to peel; gives a bit of sweetness to the tortillas. Peel; cut your plantains; you should have about 1 pound. I’ve never had exactly 1 pound – usually closer to 14 oz to be exact – but I don’t think a couple oz difference will matter in this case.

    Can I Make Plantain Tortillas Ahead of Time?

    Yes, you can prepare plantain tortillas in advance. After cooking, store them in the refrigerator for up to five days in an airtight container or resealable bag lined with parchment paper. Reheat in a dry skillet over medium heat.

    Are Plantain Tortillas Healthier Than Regular Tortillas?

    Plantain tortillas offer a healthy alternative to regular tortillas, with fewer calories, carbs, and fats. Ideal for low-calorie or low-carb diets, they are gluten-free and delicious.

    How To Store Leftover Tortillas?

    Store leftover plantain tortillas in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to a few days to maintain freshness.

    Can I Freeze Tortillas?

    Yes you can freeze plantain tortillas by laying them flat on a baking sheet for an hour. Then store them in a zip-top bag in the freezer for up to 3 months.

    🧂Serving Suggestions

    These are my favorite side dishes to serve with plantain tortillas:

    • Beans: Beans are a common feature in Mexican cuisine, served with tortillas as a side or main dish.
    • Cheese: Top your tortillas with cheddar, Monterey Jack, or queso fresco.
    • Strawberry Jalapeno Salsa: Dip or drizzle tortillas with salsa verde, roja, or Pico de Gallo.
    • Homemade Guacamole: Pair your plantain tortillas with fresh guacamole for a creamy touch. You can also try this with corn tortillas.
    • Sour Cream: Add a dollop of sour cream for extra richness.
    • Beef: Fill tortillas with ground or Slow Cooker Mongolian Beef for a hearty meal.
    • Thin Sliced Chicken Breast: Grill, roast, or sauté chicken as a tasty tortilla filling.
    • Seafood: Include seafood like Paprika Shrimp or Air Fryer Cod in tortillas for a fresh option. Fill the plantain tortillas with flavorful seasoned fish to create delicious Instant Pot Fish Tacos.
    Cooked plantain tortillas.

    🍽 Related Recipes

    • edamame stir fry in a white bowl.
      Easy Edamame Stir Fry (15-Minute Protein-Packed Side Dish)
    • Chicken And Cabbage Stir Fry Recipe.
      Chicken And Cabbage Stir Fry Recipe
    • Zucchini Egg Bake Recipe.
      Best Zucchini Egg Bake Recipe
    • New Years charcuterie Board.
      New Years Charcuterie Board

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us in our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Plantain Tortillas on a blue teatowel.

    Best Plantain Tortillas Recipe

    Angela Milnes
    Discover the perfect alternative with this Best Plantain Tortillas Recipe! Soft, flexible, and naturally gluten-free, these tortillas are made from ripe plantains for a unique, slightly sweet flavor.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Additional Time 8 minutes mins
    Total Time 33 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine Mexican
    Servings 4 Servings
    Calories 238 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 Medium Plantains peeled & cut into chunks
    • 1 Egg
    • 2 tablespoon Coconut Oil melted
    • ½ teaspoon Salt
    • ¼ cup Water

    Instructions
     

    • Place all your ingredients except the water in a high powered blender. As your mixture comes together, slowly pour the water in & blend until it looks like batter.
    • I like to use a cookie scoop to help make those round tortilla shapes & it also keeps each one about the same size due to the amount of batter.
    • When shaping the tortillas, I try & make them pretty thin. This will help them bubble up & get crispy.
    • I try & do two full cookie sheets & get about 4 tortillas on each sheet. They are about 4-5 inches across.
    • Pop them in the oven at 425 for 10 minutes, then give them a flip & bake them for another 7-10 minutes.
    • Try & really watch the last few cooking minutes. Depending on how thin you spread the tortillas, these babies could burn up. I’ve had it happen to me a couple times & it’s no bueno. 

    Notes

    Control Thickness: Adjust the thickness of the tortilla batter based on personal preference; thinner tortillas crisp up more for a crunchy texture, while thicker ones are softer.
    Use Parchment Paper: Use parchment lined baking sheet

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1gCalories: 238kcalCarbohydrates: 43gProtein: 3gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 41mgSodium: 312mgPotassium: 669mgFiber: 2gSugar: 24gVitamin A: 1576IUVitamin C: 25mgCalcium: 11mgIron: 1mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More recipes to try

    • Colorful Winter Salad
    • Bacon Egg Casserole
    • Mango and Pineapple Salsa Recipe
    • Avocado Salad
    • Baked Spaghetti Squash
    • Canned Black Bean And Corn Salsa Recipe

    The Benefits Of Colorful Vegetables

    May 27, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Different colored vegetables.

    Colorful vegetables are not just eye-catching, they pack a powerful nutritional punch too! Eating the rainbow is great for every age—from toddlers to grandmas. Whether you're vegetarian or simply aiming for more plant-based meals in your diet, we have some helpful tips on how to get the most out of colorful veg.

    With loads of recipes and ideas for making healthy eating fun, turning meal times into something special has never been easier. Let's dive right in and explore why adding vibrant veggies like purple cauliflower to your menu can be so good for your wallet and body!

    Eat Pretty Things: The Benefits Of Colorful Vegetables
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why Colorful Vegetables Benefit Health?

    Are you feeling a little lackluster lately? It might be time to add some color to your diet! Eating a rainbow of colorful veggies not only looks pretty on your plate, but it can also work wonders for your health.

    Red veggies like tomatoes and bell peppers are high in lycopene, which can help reduce the risk of heart disease. And those vibrant greens like kale and spinach? Packed with vitamins and minerals, they can boost your immune system and help protect against cancer.

    So next time you're at the grocery store, skip the beige and go for the rainbow! Your body will thank you for it.

    Colorful Vegetables Can Help Fight Disease

    Who knew that eating a rainbow of colorful vegetables could be so beneficial for our health? It turns out that these vibrant veggies are packed full of antioxidants and other nutrients that can prevent pesky diseases like cancer, diabetes, and heart disease.

    So skip the bland beige foods and fill your plate with a variety of colorful options like peppers, carrots, broccoli, and even fruits like berries and oranges.

    Not only will your taste buds thank you for the burst of delicious flavors, but your body will thank you for the disease-fighting nutrients. It's a win-win situation, all while feeling like a culinary artist with your plate full of colors!

    Different Colored Vegetables Have Different Vitamins And Minerals

    Did you know that different colored vegetables provide different vitamins and minerals? Yup, that's right! For example, orange vegetables like carrots and sweet potatoes are high in Vitamin A, which is great for your eyesight.

    On the other hand, green veggies such as kale and spinach are packed with iron, which helps maintain healthy blood cells. Red vegetables like tomatoes are loaded with lycopene, a powerful antioxidant that can help prevent heart disease.

    Eat Pretty Things: The Benefits Of Colorful Vegetables

    So, next time you're at the grocery store, grab a rainbow of veggies to ensure you're getting the full spectrum of nutrients your body needs.

    Why not try this tasty Butternut Squash Macaroni And Cheese!

    Recipes That Have Colorful Veggies

    Who says vegetables have to be bland and boring? With these recipes, you'll be able to incorporate colorful veggies into your diet without even realizing it.

    Take, for example, the Colorful Veggie Stir Fry. It's a medley of greens, reds, yellows, and oranges that are not only visually pleasing but also delicious.

    You can also make a Loaded Veggie Omelet using this fantastic recipe from Pattern Princess. So yummy!

    mixed veg stir fry colorful veggies

    Or how about the Roasted Vegetable Spaghetti Squash? It's a healthy twist on a classic pasta dish that will surely win you over. And for those mornings when you need a quick and easy breakfast, try the veggie-packed frittata.

    With these recipes, eating your veggies has never been easier or more enjoyable.

    Top Five Nutrient Dense Vegetables

    Looking for some nutrient-packed veggies to add to your diet? Look no further! Here are five superstars you'll definitely want to work into your meal plan: Spinach, Kale, Broccoli, Brussels Sprouts, and Sweet Potatoes.

    Not only are these vegetables packed with vitamins and minerals, but they each come with their own unique benefits.

    • Spinach: Spinach is a great source of iron and calcium and can help keep your bones strong. It's also full of Vitamin K, which helps promote healthy blood clotting and supports bone health.
    • \Kale: Kale is an excellent source of Vitamin C and beta-carotene, both of which have been linked to cancer prevention. Plus, kale is loaded with fiber which helps you feel full and can aid in weight loss.
    • Broccoli: Broccoli is full of antioxidants such as lutein and zeaxanthin, which help protect your eyes from UV damage. Broccoli is also rich in Vitamin C, folate, and fiber to keep you healthy and energized all day long.
    • Brussels Sprouts: Brussels sprouts are loaded with Vitamin C, a powerful antioxidant that helps fight off disease and boosts the immune system. Sprouts are also packed with vitamin K, which is important for healthy bones and blood clotting.
    • Sweet Potatoes: Last but not least, sweet potatoes are high in Vitamin A and beta-carotene, which can help protect your skin from the sun's damaging rays. Sweet Potato is also a great source of fiber and potassium, which helps regulate blood pressure.

    So there you have it — five nutrient-packed vegetables that will help keep you healthy and energized. What are you waiting for? Start adding these veggies to your diet today!

    Tips To Add Variety To Your Diet

    Eating the same thing every day can definitely get boring, but let's face it - it's also easy. However, by not switching up our meals, we risk missing out on important nutrients that come from a variety of foods.

    So, how can we make sure we're getting enough variety in our diet without sacrificing convenience? First and foremost, try adding different spices and herbs to your meals. This can instantly change the flavor profile of your dish and can even turn a bland meal into something delicious.

    Additionally, try to incorporate different colored fruits and vegetables into your meals. Not only will it brighten up your plate, but each color provides different vitamins and nutrients that our bodies need. Lastly, don't be afraid to try new foods! Pick up something you've never had before at the grocery store and experiment with it in the kitchen. Who knows, you might end up with a new favorite food!

    Eat Colorful Vegetables Daily

    Eating colorful vegetables can be delicious and beneficial to our overall health. The brightly colored veggies provide a vast array of vitamins and minerals that our bodies need. From nutrient-rich greens to some surprisingly sweet root vegetables, you can explore a rainbow of flavors with each meal.

    Following these simple tips, such as being mindful of variety in your diet and eating seasonally when possible, will ensure that we get the most out of our meals. Eating healthy doesn't have to be boring - you can make veggie-filled meals bright and flavorful.

    Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese

    May 27, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Chocolate valentine pretzels on a plate.

    Today's recipe is about to become your new favorite comfort food: Butternut Squash Mac and Cheese! Imagine creamy, cheesy pasta with a hint of autumn sweetness from our beloved butternut squash. It's like a warm hug on a chilly evening, but in food form!

    butternut squash mac and cheese
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    If you love this recipe be sure to taste our Creamy Oven Baked Mac and Cheese along with this Unstuffed Cabbage Roll Soup or this tasty Air Fryer Sweet and Sour Chicken Dish!

    💖 Why This Recipe Works

    • Creamy and Comforting – The butternut squash adds a natural sweetness and velvety texture that makes this mac and cheese ultra creamy and comforting without being too heavy.
    • Nutritious Twist – Packed with vitamins, fiber, and antioxidants, this butternut squash mac and cheese is a sneaky way to add more veggies into a family favorite while still delivering the cheesy goodness everyone craves.
    • Kid-Friendly – With its rich, cheesy flavor and creamy texture, even picky eaters will enjoy this healthier take on mac and cheese! It’s a win for both kids and adults.

    ⭐ Star Ingredients

    • Butternut Squash: Adds a sweet, slightly nutty flavor and creamy texture.
    • Shallots: Provide a mild onion flavor that complements the squash.
    • Garlic: Intensifies the savory depth of the dish.
    • Fresh Sage: Infuses an earthy, aromatic flavor.
    • Virgin Olive Oil: Helps in roasting and adds a smooth finish.
    • Kosher Salt: Balances the flavors and enhances the overall taste.
    • Coconut Milk: Offers a rich creaminess and subtle sweetness.
    • Vegetable Water: Used to thin out the sauce while adding extra nutrients.
    • Macaroni Noodles: The base of the dish, they absorb the flavors well.
    • Sharp Cheddar Cheese: Melts into a flavorful, gooey cheese sauce.
    • Parmesan: Optional topping for added cheesy flavor and a nice golden crust.

    For the complete list of ingredients with measurements and instructions, please see the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    📖  Substitutions & Variations

    • Aromatic Flavor Swap: If minced garlic or garlic powder is not on hand, onion powder can serve as a suitable substitute.
    • Milk Replacement: Swap coconut milk for regular milk, adjusting the quantity slightly due to the thinner consistency compared to coconut milk.

    🔪 How To Make Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese?

    Step One: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. In an oven safe skillet heat the olive oil. Add the shallots and minced garlic. Saute for 2 minutes, then place the skillet into the oven for 25-30 minutes until your butternut squash is soft.

    Be sure to read our article: How To Cut Butternut Squash!

    Step Two: Cook your pasta noodles on the stove top according to package directions or cook in the Instant Pot with 4 cups of water for 4 minutes. Once the pasta has finished cooking drain any excess water.

    Step Three: Place roasted butternut squash into the blender. Add the coconut milk and vegetable stock. If you don't have veggie stock you can use chicken broth or water.

    Step Four: Blitz your butternut squash sauce and add kosher salt and pepper for seasoning. Add the sage and two cups of shredded cheese to the pureed squash. This will give the sauce the cheese flavor everyone loves.

    Step Five: Combine the cooked pasta to the cheese and butternut squash puree and mix until all of the noodles are covered in the delicious sauce.

    Step Six: Garnish with Parmesan cheese (optional). Serve hot and enjoy your delicious Butternut Squash Mac and Cheese dish!

    butternut squash mac and cheese

    👩‍🍳 Expert Tips

    • Creamy Consistency: To achieve a velvety texture, ensure the butternut squash is cooked until tender before blending it into the cheese sauce.
    • Seasoning Balance: Taste the sauce as you go and adjust the seasoning accordingly. Remember, flavors can intensify as the dish cooks.

    💭 FAQs

    Which is the Best Cheese For This Macaroni Dish?

    I prefer to use sharp cheddar cheese for this dish as it pairs well with the hidden veggie (butternut squash) and gives this dish a nice cheesy flavor. You can also use other cheeses like Gruyere, Gouda or even Mozzarella cheese for a different flavor profile.

    How Can I Make Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese Gluten-Free And Vegan?

    Buy gluten free macaroni elbows and make gluten free pasta dish. Additionally, by incorporating vegan cheese alternatives, this becomes a delectable vegan butternut squash mac and cheese recipe that will surely impress your loved ones with its creamy goodness!

    Can I Air Fry The Butternut Squash Cubes?

    Crispy air-fried cubed butternut squash makes for the perfect pairing with mac and cheese, offering a delightful alternative to oven roasted squash.

    Can I Use Frozen Or Canned Butternut Squash For This Recipe?

    Yes, you can use canned or frozen butternut squash for convenience, ensuring a quick and easy preparation without compromising the dish's delicious flavors.

    Best Way To Store Mac And Cheese

    Store any leftover Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. Ensure proper refrigeration to maintain freshness.

    💖 Serving Suggestions

    These are my favorite dishes to serve with butternut squash macaroni cheese:

    • Air Fryer Chicken Cutlets: For a protein-packed option, consider serving grilled chicken on the side for a well-rounded and satisfying meal.e.
    • Chipotle Cream Sauce: For a spicy kick, consider serving a creamy chipotle sauce on the side to add depth and smokiness to each bite.
    • Mango Arugula Salad: A crisp green salad with a mango complements the creamy mac and cheese beautifully.
    • Roasted Vegetables: Roasted vegetables such as carrots, zucchini, or bell peppers can be a delightful accompaniment, adding depth to the meal.
    butternut squash mac and cheese

    🍽 Try These Tasty Soup Recipes

    • Broccoli Soup With Feta Cheese.
      Creamy Broccoli Soup With Feta Cheese
    • Zesty Cabbage Soup in a white bowl.
      Zesty Cabbage Soup (With Lemon & Herbs – One Pot Wonder!)
    • French Onion Soup With Cheesy Baguette Slices.
      French Onion Soup With Cheesy Baguette Slices
    • Instant Pot Chinese Dumpling Soup.
      Best Chinese Dumpling Soup (Instant Pot Recipe)

    Did you make this recipe? Leave a review and a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ rating below, or tag us inin our Facebook Group! Alternatively, bookmark it in your browser or save to Pinterest.

    Chocolate valentine pretzels on a plate.

    Butternut Squash Mac And Cheese

    Angela Milnes
    This creamy, cheesy dish features a velvety sauce made with roasted butternut squash, adding a subtle sweetness and a boost of nutrients to your classic mac and cheese.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Dinners
    Cuisine American
    Servings 5 Servings
    Calories 405 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 lbs Butternut Squash Approx. 4 Cups, Peeled & Diced
    • ¼ Cup Shallots Diced
    • 2 Cloves Garlic Minced
    • 2 tablespoon Fresh Sage Chopped
    • 2 tablespoon Olive Oil
    • 1 teaspoon Salt
    • 1 Cup Coconut Milk
    • 1 Cup Reserved Pasta Water
    • 8 oz Box Of Gluten Free Elbow Noodles
    • Parmesan Optional Topping

    Instructions
     

    • preheat the oven to 400 degrees. In an oven safe skillet heat the olive oil. Add the shallots and minced garlic. Saute for 2 minutes, then place the skillet into the oven for 25-30 minutes until your butternut squash is soft.
    • Be sure to read our article: how to cut butternut squash!
    • Cook your pasta noodles on the stove top according to package directions or cook in the Instant Pot with 4 cups of water for 4 minutes. Once the pasta has finished cooking drain any excess water.
    • Once the butternut squash cubes are roasted, place them into the blender. Add the coconut milk and vegetable stock. If you don’t have veggie stock you can use chicken broth or water.
    • Blitz your pumpkin sauce and add kosher salt and pepper for seasoning. Add the sage and two cups of shredded cheese to the pureed squash. This will give the sauce the cheese flavor everyone loves.
    • Combine the cooked macaroni noodles to the cheese and butternut squash sauce and mix until all of the noodles are covered in the delicious sauce.
    • Garnish with Parmesan cheese (optional). Serve hot and enjoy your delicious Macaroni and Cheese Butternut Squash dish!
    • I hope you enjoyed this simple and easy recipe. It’s one of my favorite mac and cheese recipes.

    Notes

    Creamy Consistency: To achieve a velvety texture, ensure the butternut squash is cooked until tender before blending it into the cheese sauce.
    Seasoning Balance: Taste the sauce as you go and adjust the seasoning accordingly. Remember, flavors can intensify as the dish cooks.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 405kcalCarbohydrates: 59gProtein: 10gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 1mgSodium: 87mgPotassium: 908mgFiber: 6gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 19289IUVitamin C: 40mgCalcium: 129mgIron: 4mg
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe Rate this Recipe
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was!

    More Recipes to try

    • Baked Spaghetti Squash
    • Easy Chinese Chicken Salad
    • Easy Texas Smoked Turkey Breast
    • Pumpkin Spice Cinnamon Rolls
    • Instant Pot Zuppa Toscana Soup
    • Cheesy Mexican Steak And Rice

    Best Healthy Snacks For Travel

    May 27, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Snacks for travel.

    As a mom, I understand that road trips are not as enjoyable with kids. They can get tired easily and finding healthy food options can be a challenge. That's why I've put together a guide to help you keep your children's energy levels up. It includes tips like packing your own snacks and seeking out local healthy food options. Let's ensure that your road trip is full of fun and healthy options for your kids! Get our list of best healthy snacks for travel here!

    You don't want to rely on the gas station for convenience food. Gas stations won't always stock healthy options and healthy fat foods.

    best healthy snacks for travelling
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Healthy Snacks For Traveling

    So why eat healthy snacks while traveling? Eating healthy snacks helps to maintain energy levels and reduces cravings for unhealthy foods. Kids especially need nutritious snacks to keep them energized and alert while traveling.

    Best Healthy Travel Snack Ideas

    So here are some healthy snack ideas to try while travelling. These healthy travel snacks will keep your children energized and maintain their focus while on the road.

    It can be hard to have a balanced meal while travelling so finding the healthiest travel snacks will surely help.

    Healthy road trip snacks can keep the kids more focused and energized and help reduce frustration, tantrums and overall boredom.

    Fresh Fruit

    Fresh Fruit: Pack some of your children’s favorite fresh fruits such as apples, oranges, bananas or grapes for a healthy snack on the go. Fresh produce is a great way to get nutrition and energy while travelling on the road.

    best healthy snacks for travelling

    Trail Mix

    Trail Mix: Create your own trail mix with nuts, dried fruit, shredded coconut and seeds (such as pumpkin or sunflower seeds) for a nutritious and tasty treat!

    If you are looking for an alternative to sugary snacks, this is a great way to provide wholesome fuel for your travels.

    Whole Grain Crackers

    Whole Grain Crackers: Bring along some whole grain crackers and top them with nut butter or hummus for a filling snack. Whole grains are a great source of energy and fiber to keep your kids going on the road.

    Dark Chocolate

    Dark Chocolate: Healthy dark chocolate is higher in antioxidants than other types of chocolate, making it a great choice for a sweet snack. Try dark chocolate chips

    Veggies

    Veggies: Pack sliced carrots or baby carrots, celery or cucumbers to munch on during the car ride. Veggies are a great source of vitamins and minerals, plus they’re low in calories.

    Popcorn

    Popcorn: Pop some popcorn for a snack that is low in calories and high in fiber. Your kids will love eating popcorn on their next trip for sure. Check out our super awesome Christmas Popcorn Recipe.

    Yogurt

    Yogurt: Pack individual yogurt cups, yogurt tubes or make your own yogurt smoothies to keep everyone cool and refreshed while driving.

    Almond Butter Fingers

    Almond Butter Fingers: Spread some almond butter on celery or whole grain crackers for an energizing snack. You could also use peanut butter or trade the butter for cream cheese!

    Hard Boiled Eggs

    Hard Boiled Eggs: Bring along some hard boiled eggs for a protein-packed snack. Eggs have healthy fats and just the right amount of protein to keep those tummies full.

    Granola Bars

    Granola Bars: Choose granola bars or protein bars with natural ingredients such as oats, nut butters and dried fruits.

    best healthy snacks for travelling

    Cheese

    Cheese: String cheese, cheese sticks, cheese slices, cubes of cheddar and mozzarella make a great snack that’s high in protein.

    Smoothies

    Smoothies: Make smoothies with frozen berries, banana, yogurt and almond milk for an easy grab-and-go treat! No added sugar but plenty of natural sweetness and plant protein to keep you feeling satisfied.

    Mini Salads

    Try making a mini protein salad. Grab spinach leaves, sliced bell peppers, grilled chicken or turkey, boiled eggs, cherry tomatoes and a light vinaigrette for a filling and nutritious snack.

    Switch the diced chicken for tuna and make a tuna salad or add roasted chickpeas for a non meat option.

    healthy-meal-food-assortment.

    Tips For Organizing Healthy Travel Snacks

    So here are some great tips for organising healthy travel snacks before your road trip or journey.

    1. Pack Your Own Fresh Produce

    My favorite snack is apples because they are convenient, come in natural packaging, and my husband eats them entirely (except for the stem).

    Besides apples, there are other healthy fruits and vegetables that don't need refrigeration and can be great for traveling. Just make sure to wash them before you leave.

    • Apples
    • Clementines
    • Grapes
    • Blueberries
    • Bananas
    • Avocados
    • Cherry Tomatoes
    • Baby Carrots
    • Celery
    • Baby Cucumbers
    • Sugar Snap Peas
    • Sliced Sweet Bell Peppers

    2. Plan Your Travel Snacks

    If your kids are like mine, then they’re all – Thanks, mom, for the fruits & veg, but we wanted SNACKS! I get it. I like salty, sweet & crunchy things too but their might not be any convenience stores on your road trip so make sure to plan ahead and pack those treats.

    3. Keep Your Travel Snacks Accessible & Organised

    When packing your travel snacks, it’s important to keep them accessible and organised. Use separate containers or snack bags for each type of snack, so that they are easy to grab when needed.

    I love using these bento box style containers for travelling - they are easy to clean and allow you to separate out your snacks.

    • Make Your Own ‘Trail Mix’. Head to the bulk items section of your store & stock up on dry roasted nuts, dried (unsweetened) fruit like goji berries or dried mango, pumpkin seeds, unsweetened coconut shreds & dairy & soy free chocolate chips. Mix all your ingredients together in an air tight container & you’ve got a prefect road snack.
    • Blue Corn Tortilla Chips.  It’s easy to make your own tortilla chips by simply brushing corn tortillas with olive oil & baking them for about 10 minutes. Serve with a small tub of salsa or guacamole.
    • Ginger Snaps. These are some of my favorite sweet snacks & great for little fingers and double up as an aid for travel sickness. They also don't have any high fructose corn syrup which is an added bonus!
    • Kale Chips. These definitely have an acquired taste, but now that I’ve had them, I’ll be packing them for all our road trips. 
    • Nut Butter. I love nut butter & love these little single serving pouches!

    3. Don't Forget Your Water Bottle

    Bringing a water bottle is not the only portable container you should bring, but it is likely the most important one.

    Staying hydrated can prevent common travel issues like an upset stomach or overindulging in unhealthy snacks, and it can also help you save money.

    When we stop to refuel, I usually buy a couple of large water bottles and refill our empty ones from them. This way, I also prevent everyone from asking for sugary drinks. 

    It's possible to use ice and water from soda fountains in some places, which is preferable because it reduces the use of plastic water bottles.

    Along with your water bottle, don’t forget to take some extra things to make your life easier.

    • Water Bottles like these are great as they help you measure how much liquid your drinking throughout the day.
    • Bags for Trash:  Keep a few small bags or containers with you to collect all your trash.
    • Reusable Utensils: If you plan on eating anywhere, make sure to bring along some sporks or reusable utensils so that you don't need single use plastic ones. Napkins: Bringing some napkins is an easy way to wipe up any messes, and they can also double as tissues if the need arises and help minimize mess.
    • Containers for Dividing up Finger Snacks

    4. Get Off The Beaten Path

    Now, this might come as a shock but fast food is not one of my favorite things to eat. I’m not saying we never eat it, I’m just saying if given a choice I’d prefer almost anything else. 

    When we’re out on the open road & our choices seem limited to fast food chains or truck stops, you can use apps like Yelp or Urban Spoon on your iPhone. You can search by location or food type & read reviews. I LOVE REVIEWS. 

    We’ve eaten at some seriously amazing local places we would’ve never found if we’d stayed on the highway. Not only are you more likely to get food that is fresh, but you’re also supporting a local establishment & what I like to call – blending with the locals. 

    We’ve eaten at small town restaurants, been welcomed by owners, had fresh ‘house specials’ & had some great meal experiences Try getting that at some fast food chain.

    5. Picnic In Paradise

    Ok, I have to admit, thinking of this title made me giggle. It isn’t exactly paradise to pull into a rest stop area but when you’re in the car with 4 antsy kids, it can be the closest thing to it. 

    You need the rest stop to accomplish three things – feed the kids, bathroom/diaper changes & get them out of the car. If you’ve packed enough healthy traveling snacks for your small army then you don’t need a highway fast food chain. 

    Make a date with nature (weather permitting) & bring a blanket to picnic at the rest stop area. The kids can nosh on all the snacks you packed & run out some of that energy. 

    6. Find Good Rest Stops

    Some rest stops have nice, grassy areas where the kids can run around, safely distanced from any cars. Then all you’ll be ready to jump back in the car & watch Caillou for the thirteenth time.

    Overall, eating healthy while travelling can be a challenge. But don’t let that discourage you from making it happen. With a little planning and some creativity, you can make sure your next road trip is as healthy as possible! Have fun and safe travels!

    Got Kids? Read the best knife safety tips for kids. Also read this great post: 8 grain free healthy lunch box ideas and Best Food For Healthy Skin.

    10 Ways To Treat ODD In Children: Best Tips

    May 26, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    A young boy holding a book.

    Being a parent is a tough job, right?

    Not only is having a child like watching your heart walk around outside of your body all day, but we also get to second guess all of our decisions & wonder if we’ve ever even doing it right. Good times. As a parent, you are teacher, cook, house keeper & chauffeur. You’re nurse, seamstress & counselor too. But what happens when your child has issues that aren’t so easily solved? Going through struggles with ODD (Oppositional Defiant Disorder) can be a challenge. As an early years teacher, I've seen first hand how diet changes can affect kids – positively & negatively.

    10 Ways To Treat ODD In Children: Best Tips.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Today, I’m excited to share a guest post from Jaclyn. Jaclyn blogs over at The Family That Heals Together & she has quite a remarkable story of her own that I’m excited to have her share with you.

    If you’ve dealt with a child who suffers from anger issues, shows defiance & aggression or you’ve ever felt like you just can’t ‘manage’ your child then Jaclyn’s story of hope is for you.

    Jaclyn was able to identify that her son was suffering from Oppositional Defiant Disorder, or ODD. Not only was she able to see this, but she’s also been able to manage his symptoms naturally – through food & supplements.

    Oppositional Defiant Disorder In Children

    It was a couple of years ago when I realized that my son’s abnormal anger and aggression were symptoms of something more. I had fought an internal battle for so long, telling myself I just wasn’t parenting him well, that I missed the signs that there was something more serious going on.

    It didn’t matter what form of discipline I tried or how hard I tried to correct his behavior, because, ultimately, it was something he couldn’t control. Once I took to the internet to research his extreme behavior, I found the answer I was looking for: he was suffering from Oppositional Defiant Disorder, or ODD.

    What Is ODD In Children?

    To be truthfully honest, when I had briefly read about oppositional defiant disorder odd in the past, it seemed like an excuse for poor parenting. Good parents don’t have children who talk back, react to instruction with anger, or have trouble obeying and following the rules, right?

    Unfortunately, it’s not that simple, and children suffering from ODD have trouble controlling their emotions and following rules, despite parents’ best efforts. Sometimes the best support is parent management training or conduct disorder training.

    ODD Symptoms In Children

    ODD is a behavior disorder that typically begins in early childhood and can last until adulthood. It can manifest itself differently in each person, but some of the most common symptoms are:

    • Opposition or defiance to other authority figures
    • Anger & aggression towards other people or objects
    • Hostile behavior or angry attitude speaking harshly.
    • Trouble following rules & directions
    • Blame-shifting & difficulty taking responsibility for actions
    • Excessive arguing & talking back to adults
    • Blaming others for their mistake and disruptive behavior
    • Frequent temper tantrums and difficulty calming down

    Environmental Factors

    A child's symptoms or defiant behavior known as oppositional behavior can usually be managed with the right strategies. Kids with ODD can also sometimes struggle with other mental health conditions or mood disorders, anxiety disorders and have risk factors for behavior disorders such as attention deficit hyperactivity disorder.

    Having a child with a conduct disorder or disruptive behavior disorder is never easy but there are certainly many ways to help the oppositional defiant disorder treated care is a benefit to your child.

    The environment can make a real difference in ODD. Studies show that the amount of time spent with parents, structured activities and opportunities to engage in positive behaviors are all important for a child’s development. Making sure there is an appropriate amount of structure and discipline can help manage these symptoms without resorting to medications or more extreme interventions.

    Nutritional Interventions For ODD

    A key factor in managing my son’s ODD is nutrition. We found that there are certain foods and supplements that can be used to help manage his symptoms.

    We started with dietary modifications such as reducing processed and sugary food, avoiding artificial colors and preservatives, and increasing the intake of healthy fats, and this did make a difference in his behavior. We also started supplementing with minerals such as zinc and magnesium to further support his brain chemistry.

    We have seen a huge improvement in my son’s symptoms since making changes to his diet and adding these supplements. Even though nutrition is not the only way to manage ODD, I believe it has been an integral part of the process in getting his behavior under control.

    Raising A Child With Defiant Disorder

    Even though I was raising my children to be compassionate, to obey and follow rules, and to treat other people with respect, my oldest son consistently failed to consider other people’s feelings, always demanding his own way and making sure his younger brothers complied with his wishes.

    When he was seven, he would hit his two-year-old brother if he had a toy he wanted. He had a hard time on his brothers’ birthdays, unable to accept a day devoted solely to another child. And if my husband or I had to correct his behavior, he would become angry and refuse to obey. At times I feared his violent reactions to his brothers and myself.

    Thankfully, I have discovered how to treat ODD naturally, and today, we rarely see a symptom of the disorder. Below, I’ll tell you the ten things I’ve learned about how to treat ODD in children.

    10 Ways To Treat ODD In Children

    Here are ten tips to help manage ODD in Children:

    Realize It Is Not Your Fault

    If you are constantly down on yourself as a parent, fighting the internal battle I once was, telling yourself you don’t measure up, you cannot be a healthy parent for your child. Begin to change your internal dialog and recognize that you are a good parent.

    You are the parent your child needs, hand-picked for him, and equipped to handle his behavioral problems. Some days are tough, boy are they tough, but recognize that you are stronger than you think and you can parent your child better than anyone else, because you know him and love him better than anyone else.

    Cut Out Artificial Colors, Sweeteners And Preservatives From Your Childs Diet

    It’s becoming more and more common knowledge that artificial colors cause behavioral problems in children. This is certainly true for children with ODD, and I have definitely observed these food additives turning kids from their sweet, normal self, into a an angry, defiant child for whom nothing is going right.

    Check Food Labels

    Watch for these ingredients on food labels under names like Red 40, FD & C Lakes, or just “artificial colors.” Any color on a food label should be a red flag. As for artificial sweeteners, you can find them on labels under the names acesulfame, aspartame, neotame, saccharin, sucralose, and sugar alcohols like xylitol and sorbitol.

    Kick Out The Preservatives

    Preservatives to watch out for include sulfates/sulfites, nitrates/nitrites, BHA (butylated hydroxyanisole), BHT (butylated hydroxytoluene), potassium bromate, and sodium benzoate. These artificial ingredients are categorized as “excitotoxins,” which means they excite neurotransmitters and cause damage to brain cells.

    This is not an exhaustive list and you should continue to educate yourself about these harmful ingredients.

    Remove Gluten From Your Child's Diet

    Gluten is another excitotoxin for some people, particularly children with behavioral problems. It poses trouble for a number of reasons. Did you know some foods actually create a morphine-like reaction for some people? Yep, eating gluten can make your kid feel like he’s high.

    Can you imagine trying to control your emotions while essentially “tripping” on gluten? Gluten produces a substance called “gluteomorphin” which becomes like an opiate to the brain, causing brain fog, as well as addiction. This is why so many children with behavioral problems crave starchy breads and carbohydrates: the opiate-like effect they get from eating these foods makes them crave more.

    Additionally, for those who have trouble digesting gluten, it sits undigested in the gut and creates leaky gut syndrome, which allows foods to leak through the gut instead of being absorbed and used appropriately by the body.

    This creates more trouble for the brain, as undigested proteins travel to the brain and create interference with neurotransmitter communications, plus this leaky gut syndrome causes malabsorption of key nutrients needed for brain health.

    Consider Removing Grains

    Oftentimes, parents say “we tried removing gluten and it didn’t make any difference for us.” Unfortunately, other grains can be allergenic and problematic for children with ODD, aside from those containing gluten. 

    There are a couple of considerations about grains: some are just plain allergenic (like corn), and some just increase the starch load, contributing to poor gut health. For instance, white rice is less likely to cause an allergic reaction, but for children with poor gut health, it may be difficult to digest and can contribute to leaky gut.

    Grains and ODD

    Grains can be difficult to digest in the first place, we’ve found that eliminating them has been the best choice for our son. Additionally, we have pinpointed corn as a major trigger for ODD episodes!

    For a while, I assumed corn would be an occasional safe, gluten-free option… until I realized my son would become angry and defiant within hours of eating corn!

    Reduce Sugar Intake

    The big, bad, sugar monster. We could all use a little less of it, but why is it so hard to kick the sugar habit? Well, there is actually a scientific reason. Like gluten, our bodies sometimes crave the very thing that harms them. Eating sugar begets the desire to eat more sugar. When we eat sugar, we feed bad bacteria and yeasts in our gut and they begin to thrive, cramming out the good bacteria.

    As they grow and take over, they demand to be fed, causing you to want to eat what they need: sugar! When our family first eliminated sugar, we did a 30 day challenge without the white stuff.

    Use Natural Sweeteners

    We replaced regular sugar with more natural sweeteners like maple syrup and honey, and once we saw that this was a pretty easy switch, we’ve never looked back. Now, we can pinpoint behaviors brought on by too much sugar consumption, even natural sugar like honey.

    We’ve even reduced fruit to help minimize the overall sugar load for our son, and his hyperactivity continues to diminish. But we have taken baby steps in the process, and each family has to find a path that works for them in reducing sugar. Kids need healthy snacks with natural sugars.

    Add Magnesium To Your Child's Diet

    We have found that a special type of magnesium has proven very beneficial for our son’s brain health. I had tried various forms of magnesium for years, with no improvement, but it wasn’t until our holistic practitioner told us about the benefits of magnesium for brain health, that I found something that worked.

    Magnesium Helps The Brain

    Magnesium is essential for cellular functioning and critical for brain health, and we have found that magnesium threonate improves brain function for our son. I’ve even found that it helps with headaches and fatigue myself!

    Detox Is The Way To Go

    Between pesticides and lawn chemicals in the air around us, to WIFI and other dirty electricity surrounding us, our bodies have a lot to contend with. We have found that by giving our son frequent detox baths, making sure he’s eliminating (using the bathroom at least once a day), and giving him lots of water to drink, we can help him flush out toxins that otherwise might accumulate in his body.

    Additionally, we support his liver with supplements like Liver Life and desiccated liver and try to make fresh-pressed juices as often as we can, mostly with organic vegetables, with a little fruit. We especially enjoy juicing celery, cucumber, green apples and lemon for a refreshing lemonade-like juice.

    Increase Good Fats

    Did you know the brain is made primarily of fat? This means it needs fat to thrive! Most pediatricians will tell you to switch to low fat milk when your child turns two, but the advice to feed children a low-fat diet really deprives them of needed nutrients, particularly those needed for brain health. We have found that by switching to whole, raw milk and cultured dairy products (not a good option for everyone, but dairy works for us), eating coconut oil, avocado oil and olive oil, as well as lots of butter, we are able to give our son the fats he needs for his brain to function better. 

    Add Fish Oil To Your Child's Diet

    Another excellent option for fat needed for brain health is fish oil. While there has been lots of controversy (read here about why our family stopped taking fermented cod liver oil) it is still important to find a good source of omega fats. Seeds like chia and flax are actually a poor source of omega fats because they are hard for our bodies to convert to the fats our brains can actually use, which is why it is important to find a source of omegas that are easily assimilated by our bodies. Personally, our family uses extra virgin cod liver oil.

    Show Unconditional Love And Support

    At his lowest, our son has struggled with self-esteem. When symptoms of ODD began to emerge for him, I noticed something very disturbing: after the worst of the anger and defiance would pass, he would get very low. He would say things like “our family would be better off without me” or “I don’t belong in this family.” It was very discouraging and broke my heart to hear him say those things. I would try to keep things in perspective and remember that he wasn’t himself and that his brain wasn’t functioning properly when he was saying those things.

    Instead of getting angry or trying to exert any type of discipline, I would just love on him during these episodes. Like really, really love on him.

    Once, when my son was having a particularly bad episode (it was his brother’s birthday AND we had eaten poorly to celebrate, so he got a double whammy!), I went into his room, and when he refused my attempts at hugging him, instead shutting himself in his closet, I began to clean his room for him. 

    When my child calmed down and came out and saw that I’d done an act of service and love for him, he was overwhelmed with feeling loved and appreciated my taking the time to do something nice for him.

    For whatever reason, this worked for him. Find out what will speak your child’s love language and do it. Remind him that even if he feels worthless, you hold him in high esteem and he’s an important part of your family, one that you love and cherish!

    Ride It Out

    When all else fails, we just ride the wave of whatever episode we’re dealing with. My son’s ODD used to last for hours, sometimes days. It was so hard not to become angry during those times, in fact, I often did become angry, because my child was standing there telling me he refused to do what I was telling him to do. He would be so angry for no real reason, and my instinct was to discipline him and force him to obey.

    For a child with ODD, this is a bad approach, and in my experience, only causes matters to get worse. As I would get angry, he would get angrier. It was during these times of extreme anger (from both of us) that would result in him later feeling badly about himself. Once my husband and I realized he couldn’t control these episodes and discipline of any sort did nothing to curb the behavior, we gave ourselves permission to just ride it out.

    To some extent, we even learned to ignore the angry outbursts. As long as our son wasn’t hurting other children, there was really no point in arguing with him or trying to make him see things our way. His brain becomes foggy during these episodes and until the fog clears, there is absolutely no sense in trying to reason with him.

    So instead of reasoning, bargaining, or punishing, we wait til it passes, then we can talk later about what happened and why he felt that way. He usually admits that he ate something he shouldn’t have, which allow us to talk with him about “brain foods” and remind him why we eat the way we do.

    Parenting A Child With Oppositional Defiant Disorder ODD

    Parenting a child with ODD is not for the faint of heart, but rest assured, it can get better! Diet changes can be hard work and take time to master, but seeing the fruits of your labor as your child’s behavior begins to improve provides the motivation needed to stick with it and continue to explore and discover what works best, diet and supplement-wise for your kiddo. Don't forget to talk to your child's healthcare provider for the best support for your child's specific problem behaviors.

    Have you noticed particular foods that bring out undesirable behaviors in your child?

    Best Knife Safety Tips For Kids

    May 25, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    A knife on a wooden board.

    As a preschool teacher who has fed kids many times and studied nutrition for children, I had the opportunity to learn all about kitchen knife safety. Using a knife safely is important for adults and children alike. In fact, it is even more important for children, since they are still learning and developing. With that in mind, I wanted to write this article about the importance of knife safety and share the best knife safety tips for kids.

    Best Knife Safety Tips For Kids
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Knifes Are Not Toys

    Knives are not toys & can definitely cause injury if not properly used or respected. These are tips I’ve picked up along my many years of cooking & what I’ve seen work best with the kids I've taught. I encourage you to experiment with your kiddos & see what works best for them! The one thing I'd always recommend is an excellent knife & cutting board as well.

    Top Knife Safety Tips For Kids

    So here are my top tips for teaching kids to use a knife properly. Kitchen knives can be used by kids and can be used safely with the proper technique and education.

    Never Let Kids Use Knives Unsupervised

    Never let kids use knives unsupervised: Make sure an adult is always nearby to supervise and provide guidance when needed. Even if a child knows how to use a knife, accidents can still happen and supervision is key.

    Always Use A Cutting Board

    Always use a cutting board: Cutting boards provide a secure flat surface to stand on and also reduce the risk of an injury. If possible, get a child-sized cutting board so they can easily reach it.

    Choose The Right Size Knife

    Choose the right size knife for your child’s hands – Each knife has a specific handle size. Make sure you choose knives with handles that fit comfortably in your child’s hands.

    Whether using a small paring knife or a serrated knife for larger cutting tasks, finding the right size knife will help them feel more confident and secure. Using the wrong knife size can also lead to an increased risk of injury especially when cutting tricky vegetables like butternut squash.

    Practice Knife Skills With Soft Foods

    Practice knife skills with soft foods: It’s important to let your little one practice their cutting skills on food that is easy to cut.

    Start with softer foods such as bananas, avocados and tomatoes. Gradually move on to harder foods such as carrots and potatoes and other vegetables.

    Keep Those Knifes Sharp

    It's important to keep the knife blade sharp. If your child has a knife slip, remind them not to panic and always keep their fingers away from the blade. If you’re feeling nervous, it is best to have an adult take over at that point in time. Keep sharpening steel to help keep your sharp knives in top condition. Sharpening steel will keep the edge of a knife straight and sturdy.

    Always Store Knives Properly

    Always store knives properly: When not in use, make sure knives are stored safely out of reach of children or within a locked drawer. Knife blocks should be kept out of reach and off the counter. You don't want the little ones reaching for the knife block or trying to use a sharp knife unsupervised.

    Have designated storage boxes for all your kitchen knives and scissors, as well as other sharp objects such as peelers and graters.

    Use A Knife Guard

    Finally, use a knife guard. Knife guards are great tools to protect and store the blade on a kitchen knife. This is important for keeping your child safe and also keeps knives sharp. Keeping the knife sharp will help prevent slips from a dull blade.

    Make Safety A Priority

    Most importantly, make safety a priority and have conversations about proper knife usage. Talk to your children about their responsibilities when using knives and the importance of following safety rules.

    By incorporating these tips into your kitchen routine, you can help ensure that your kids know how to use knives safely and

    Stand At The Right Height

    Kitchen counters are built so they are just the right height for most people. You want your kids to stand on a stool or chair that puts the counter at about waist height. They should be able to clearly see what they are cutting.

    Teach Proper Knife Techniques

    How to properly handle & use a knife was something I taught my daughter pretty early. Good knife skills are very important especially when your little one wants to start helping you in the kitchen. Use these basic knife skills to help build confidence in your kids (& yourself – calm down, mama).

    The following kitchen knife safety tips are for using the right knife correctly on a cutting board.

    Always Cut Away From Yourself

    Always cut away from yourself: Remind your child that when using a knife, they should always cut away from themselves and their hands. This will help reduce the risk of an injury while using a kitchen knife.

    How To Hold your Kitchen Knife

    Some people feel there is only one way you should hold your knife. I feel that holding a knife is kind of like holding a pencil. If someone has something that works for them, I suggest they use what comes naturally to them.

    Different kids may hold their knives differently and you don't need to worry or encourage them of them to change their hand position. Regardless of whether their hand position is ‘correct’ or not, as long as it is safe they can use it because it’s what is comfortable for them.

    You can start your kids out with a smaller knife if an 8 inch chef’s knife seems to cumbersome. See what position your child naturally uses when they hold their knife.

    ‘The Grip’

    You don't want a falling knife. Teach the kids to grip their knife correctly. Encourage them to hold the knife comfortably in their dominant hand like a pencil. The blade should be facing away from them and the handle should be pointing towards them with the thumb on top of the handle. Once they have a good grip, they can start chopping away!

    Best Knife Safety Tips For Kids

    ‘The Pointer’

    In their other hand, your child should use a pointer finger to guide the knife. This finger should be curled inwards towards their palm and steady on top of whatever they are cutting., allowing them to control the pressure and speed of the knife as it cuts. Encourage them to keep this finger out of harm's way at all times.

    learning to point and grip the knife

    Rock The Knife

    The most common technique your child will be using will have them ‘rocking’ their blade from point to end. Have them start out with the point of the blade on the cutting board.

    learning to point and grip the knife

    Then they will push the blade away from them, following the natural curve of the blade.

    Best Knife Safety Tips For Kids

    Keep Fingers Out Of The Way When Using A Sharp Knife

    Your children's fingers will try & grip around whatever they are cutting. When holding smaller things like potatoes or smaller pieces of veg, you don’t want them so curled under that they will get caught as the blade goes through the vegetable.

    Since my daughter has smaller hands than mine I notice her natural tendency is to stick the pinky finger in the air.

    Just make sure they have a solid hold on their vegetable & as their hands get bigger that pinky should help hold out.

    Chop And Draw: Kitchen Knife Safety

    Another fun skill your kids can use is ‘The Chop’. Have them place the palm of their free hand flat on the top of the blade.

    The kids can then push the knife away from them while moving the knife in a 45 degree direction & then back again.

    ‘The Draw’ is a good way to cut longer vegetables. My daughter felts more comfortable using a smaller knife when she was younger so she had more control over her drawing motion.

    Have the kids place the tip of the blade on the cutting board & draw the tip back towards them.

    Slow And Sharp Cutting

    I know it might seem frightening but using a sharp knife will actually be more safe than using a dull knife. Dull knives are more likely to slip off of whatever you are cutting, making it more likely for you to cut yourself.

    You should also encourage your kids to practice cutting as slowly as possible. If you are right in the middle of making dinner in a rush, it may not be the best time to supervise your child cutting. This is not the time you want to be distracted from what they are doing.

    Try not to have the tv in sight or other siblings rushing around & distracting your child as well. Focus is the word you should be thinking of here. Focusing on a secure grip while cutting food on a flat surface will ensure knife safety and at it's best.

    Keep Your Knives Clean

    Don't forget to keep your knives clean. As your children learn the basics of knife safety, make sure they also understand the importance of cleaning their knife after every use.

    This helps to prevent bacteria from spreading and keeps their knives in good condition. It is always best to store a knife separately from other kitchen items and away from small hands reach.

    Don't Be Nervous

    I hear ya, moms. Some of you are saying you’re just not ready for your kids to start handling knives. I saw a great suggestion online to use play-doh & a lettuce knife for practice until you feel confident in your kid’s knife skills. I think this is a brilliant suggestion & gives you an opportunity to teach knife techniques you & your child feel comfortable with!

    Knife Safety Is Super Important

    Knife safety is a skill that should be taught to children from a young age. Following these tips will ensure kids are using knives safely and correctly. If you have any additional questions or concerns, talk with your child’s healthcare provider for more information. Thanks for taking the time to read these knife safety tips.

    Learn about the best healthy snacks for travel with kids here!

    The Gaps Diet And Pregnancy

    May 25, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    A pregnant woman holding a bowl of fruits.

    Learn about the gaps diet and pregnancy!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Motherhood and Dilemma's

    THE MODERN MAMA HAS BEEN GIVEN A DILEMMA. SHE IS BRINGING HER BABY INTO A WORLD THAT HAS “SPENT DOWN” ITS NUTRITIONAL WEALTH, WHILE AT THE SAME TIME FILLING IT WITH TOXINS.

    Traditional peoples had it better. A nutritional heritage, passed down from generation to generation of peoples eating real food, in an environment devoid of thousands of man-made chemicals…this genetically communicated a better message to the body.

    “…failure to attend to the proper care and feeding of our bodies doesn’t just affect us, it affects our genes – and that means it may affect our offspring.”

    “If you start early enough, the fruits of your efforts will be clearly visible in the bones of your child’s face…” ~ Dr. Cate Shanahan, author of Deep Nutrition

    A pregnant woman holding a bowl of fruits.

    ALL children are precious and beautiful, but no one sets out intending to bring another child into the world with physical and mental setbacks if it can be helped. To give ourselves the best chance of producing a beautiful, healthy baby, it is important to start thinking about it before conception. If you are already expecting a baby, it is best to start making changes straight away.

    What Is The Gaps Diet?

    Gaps stands for Gut and Psychology Syndrome and is a nutrient-rich, gut healing diet. It is based on the theory that many physical and mental illnesses are linked to gut health, and through providing the body with what it needs nutritionally, many issues can be healed.

    The importance of the gut microbiome is only recently being understood, but now we know that proper nourishment and a good balance of microbes can help ensure our overall wellbeing and the Gaps diet can help provide natural treatment for a leaky gut or poor digestive symptoms .

    The Gaps diet focuses on healing the gut lining before moving onto the next stage of reintroducing healthy and nutrient-rich foods to ensure optimal health.

    Can You Follow The Gaps Diet During Pregnancy?

    Yes, you can follow the Gaps Diet during pregnancy but it is advised that you seek professional advice first.

    The Gaps Diet for pregnancy takes this concept a step further, by providing extra nutrition to both mother and baby while in utero. By restoring healthy bacteria to the gut of an expectant mother, the theory is that it will create a healthier environment in which to conceive and grow a baby.

    The Gaps Diet And Pregnancy

    What Is A Mom To Do?

    The only thing that any mother (entrusted with small and dependent human beings) can do, is the best she can with what she knows. Today I hope to give you some information that will both help and inform, because a mama with knowledge is a powerful mama.

    How Mom's Health Is Affected By Pregnancy

    First we need to talk about the beautiful but demanding event of pregnancy on the woman’s body. The demands of producing a baby draw down maternal stores of a full spectrum of nutrients, and if there isn’t enough “extra” for baby then nutrients are stolen from mom, including, calcium from her bones, brain-building fats from her brain, minerals, and more.

    Maternal brains can actually shrink, primarily in the hippo-campus and temporal lobe areas…which are responsible for short-term memory and emotion. Ring any bells, mamas?

    Gut And Psychology Syndrome Diet

    THE (GAPS) DIET FOR PREGNANCY

    This is where the Gaps Diet comes in. With built-in food and lifestyle guidelines, this diet works to “heal and seal” a leaky gut, restore friendly bacteria, provide key nutrients that are lacking from our modern diets, while also reducing inflammation. This will help to reduce the need to steal nutrients from mom, and provide more than enough for baby.

    Is This An Extremely Restrictive Diet?

    No, the One of the best aspects of this diet is that it can be tailored to individual needs – some people do better on high-fat or -protein diets, while others may respond better to higher carbohydrate diets. There are also options for vegetarians and vegans, so there truly is something for everyone. The Gaps Diet can also help to reduce the frequency and intensity of morning sickness that many women experience during pregnancy.

    Following The Gaps Diet

    Due to many modern factors many women have low reserves of the fat soluble vitamins, which sets their children up for deficiency and early onset of digestive issues, poor brain development, poor bone structure, and more. There is no need for our precious little ones to drain us of all these precious nutrients, but it is all too common.

    We have lost the knowledge and art of building nutrient reserves for the task of childbearing…an art that many healthy indigenous peoples knew well and treasured from generation to generation.

    Fat Soluble Nutrients And The Gaps Diet

    Fat soluble nutrients are at the top of the list, for development of the whole body and the brain. Every traditional culture around the world knew that pregnant women need very special nutrition.

    During pregnancy the fetus takes priority over the mother in nutrition, so if the mother is deficient in some nutrients, her body will become more deficient in order to feed the baby, but the baby may still not get enough.

    Poor Digestion And Gut Dysbiosis

    A main reason for mom’s poor health is poor digestion and an imbalance of good gut microbes to harmful gut microbes. A well-functioning digestive system makes sure that we are fed well and protected from many environmental pitfalls. When we are eating in a “stressed out” state, or have low stomach acid, or poor bile flow, or the gut flora is abnormal, the whole digestive process goes wrong…and we cannot digest and absorb food properly and then we develop multiple nutritional deficiencies such as:

    • Vitamin B deficiencies, especially B12 & B6
    • Amino acid deficiencies from poor protein digestion
    • Low vitamin A, D, & K2
    • Low minerals (our “spark plugs”)
    • Essential fatty acid deficiency

    Improving Gut Flora

    Our gut flora is the main source of B vitamins, vitamin K2, and many other nutrients our body produces. As a result, a woman with a compromised gut has serious deficiencies in these nutrients, which can lead to maternal anemia, and nutritional deficiencies in the baby, which in turn can lead to fetal malformations and other serious problems.

    Fat Soluble Vitamins

    Fat-soluble vitamins A, D and K are essential for building a healthy body for the baby. In a mom with compromised digestion, these vitamins are in great demand to deal with toxicity, so there may not be enough left for the baby. As we live in a world of fat phobia, many women limit their fat consumption, making the whole situation worse.

    Mineral Vitamins

    Mineral metabolism is very complex…in order for the body to absorb minerals we need good stomach acid expression and gut microbes. In order for the body to use minerals appropriately we need fat-soluble vitamins. These factors are lacking in women with compromised digestion.

    What Damages Out Gut Microbes?

    • Antibiotics – Penicillins, tetracyclines, antifungal antibiotics
    • Processed carbs & sugar (feeds pathogens, changes pH)
    • High grain fiber diet
    • Prescription drugs (such as pain killers, steroids, etc…drug induced gut dysbiosis can be especially difficult to treat)
    • Birth control pill
    • Bottle feeding
    • Prolonged fasting or starvation or overeating
    • Disease
    • Stress
    • And more

    Why Are Probiotic Foods And Supplements So Important?

    They help with:

    • Gastrointestinal disorders of all kinds
    • Anxiety
    • Digestion
    • Allergies
    • Autism
    • Bacterial infections
    • Chronic viral infections
    • Urogenital infections Hepatitis, liver cirrhosis & biliary disease
    • Tuberculosis
    • Meningitis
    • Malignancy
    • Arthritis
    • Diabetes
    • Lower cholesterol & prevent arterial disease
    • Weight issues
    • Osteoporosis (enhance calcium assimilation & metabolism)
    • Burns of various degrees
    • Perioperative care and intensive care in surgical patients and patients with massive blood loss
    • Clinical infections
    • Autoimmune disorders
    • Moods Produce
    • B vitamins
    • Synthesize Vitamin K
    • Integrity of our intestinal wall
    • And more

    A Mother With Abnormal Digestion Is Likely To Have An Unhealthy Baby. Why?

    • Babies pick up our gut microbes as they pass through the vaginal canal and they develop abnormal gut microbes.
    • Their immune system is compromised
    • With compromised immunity, our babies are more suceptible to frequent ear and chest infections, which often are treated with antibiotics
    • Antibiotics further damage the gut microbes & immune system
    • If we then add vaccinations and the usual weaning diet of cereal grains, then we end up with gut dysbiosis in our babies, allergies, digestive problems, toxicity, and even brain dysfunctions.

    So that part about informing and helping? It is important to do what we can to give our babies a good start. To help you, here are 3 main steps to take:

    1. THE GAPS PROTOCOL!

    GAPS has an amazing ability to heal the gut, gently detox, and restore nutrients. (Note: If pregnant or nursing, do not do the Introduction version of the GAPS diet, only Full)

    2. REDUCE THE TOXIC LOAD (WHATEVER TOXINS ARE IN OUR BODIES, THEY ACCUMULATE IN LARGE AMOUNTS IN OUR BABIES)

    • Pregnancy is not a good time to visit your dentist! Everything dentists use in your mouth is toxic and will increase the level of toxicity going to your baby. So, visit your dentist only in emergency, and even then discuss less toxic and less invasive options before proceeding with any treatment.
    • Avoid all personal care products, cleaning chemicals, make up, hair dyes, perfumes and all other man-made chemicals.
    • Reduce your exposure to absolute minimum and use only natural alternatives. It is important for a pregnant woman to avoid electronic pollution and radiation…of course you don’t have to completely avoid mobile phones, computers and TV, but keep in mind that they emit radiation, which can be harmful for your baby, so limit your exposure to them.

    3. PREPARE THE VAGINAL CANAL FOR BIRTH

    In the last 1 – 2 months of pregnancy, populate the birth canal with probiotic bacteria, using live natural yogurt, kefir or a good quality probiotic powder after you bathe. Allow to dry and stay on skin. A woman’s vagina has a very rich microbial flora, which needs to be dominated by beneficial microbes.

    4. TAKE CARE OF YOUR GUT MICROBES WITH PROBIOTIC FOODS, PROBIOTIC SUPPLEMENTS AND THE GAPS DIET.

    5. PREPARE FOR BREASTFEEDING

    • Breast milk is the best food for baby! Apply live natural yogurt, kefir, or probiotic on the nipples in the last months of pregnancy and during breastfeeding.

    Avoid toxins, processed foods, & drugs…everything we have in our blood can get into our milk.

    Best Fermented Foods For Gaps Diet

    Fermanted foods are the most important part of GAPS diet. These provide beneficial bacteria and enzymes that help to restore balance in the gut. Here are some fermented foods you can use on GAPs:

    • Yogurt

    • Kefir

    • Kimchi

    • Sauerkraut

    • Coconut yogurt

    • Kombucha

    • Pickles

    • Tempeh

    • Miso

    • Natto

    • Beet kvass.

    These are just a few of the fermented foods and fermented vegetables you can use to replenish your gut microbes and help restore balance in the digestive tract. As with any dietary change, it is important to consult a health professional before making any drastic changes to your diet.

    Gaps Diet Guidelines

    Additionally, it is best to start slowly and introduce one fermented food at a time until you find which ones work for you and can easily be incorporated into your daily routine. By eating these foods regularly, you will notice an improvement in digestion as well as overall health.

    Is The Gaps Diet A Gluten Free Diet?

    Yes, the GAPS diet does not include any gluten grains. The introduction diet includes a lot of nutrient rich foods such as meats, fish, vegetables, fruits, and some healthy fats and oils. On the full version of GAPs you can also add nuts and seeds but there still may be some foods that are excluded in order to avoid any type of food sensitivities.

    When following the GAPS diet, it is important to be aware of what you are eating and its effects on your body. Be sure to listen to your body and consult with a health professional if needed. With some patience and dedication, the GAPS diet can be a great tool for restoring balance in the gut and improving your overall health.

    Is The Gaps Diet A Low Carb Diet?

    The GAPS diet is not a low-carb diet. While carbohydrates are limited in the introduction phase of the diet, complex carbs such as squash, sweet potato and quinoa are slowly added back into the diet during the full version.

    Additionally, it is also important to note that while carbohydrate intake is reduced in the GAPs diet, it is not eliminated. Therefore, you can still enjoy some of your favorite carbs in moderation.

    By following the GAPS diet guidelines and making sure that you are eating a balanced diet, you can easily find ways to incorporate healthy complex carbohydrates back into your meals while avoiding processed foods. This will help ensure that your body is getting all of

    Raw Vegetables And The Gaps Diet

    Raw vegetables are an important part of the GAPS diet because they contain beneficial enzymes, vitamins and minerals that can help to heal the digestive tract. Eating plenty of raw vegetables on a daily basis can also help improve digestion and absorption of nutrients from other foods.

    It is best to choose organic, locally-grown produce whenever possible. Avoid canned foods and processed foods, as these are generally lower in nutrition.

    In addition to raw vegetables, GAPS also recommends eating starchy vegetables like potatoes, squash and yams, as these can help provide energy and support the healing process.

    First Stage Of Gaps Diet

    The first stage of the GAPS diet is an elimination phase, during which certain foods are completely removed from the diet. This includes all grains, processed sugars, vegetable oils and store-bought dairy products.

    The Elimination Diet

    During this phase, it is important to focus on eating nourishing and nutrient-dense whole foods like organic vegetables, fermented foods, homemade bone broth and pastured meat.

    It is also important to drink plenty of water during this time to help flush out toxins from the body and help support the healing process. After a few weeks on the elimination phase, you may gradually reintroduce some of the eliminated foods in small amounts to see how your body responds.

    Second Stage Of The Gaps Diet

    The next step of the GAPS diet is to focus on restoring balance in the digestive system. This includes eating plenty of fermented foods, probiotic supplements and other gut-healing foods like bone broth.

    It is important to avoid processed sugars, refined carbohydrates and processed oils during this phase. Avoid packaged and canned foods and focus on organic foods and homemade fermented foods when possible.

    Try eating the following foods:

    • Vegetables
    • Fruits
    • Healthy proteins (e.g.,pastured meats, wild-caught fish)
    • Fermented foods .. vegetables and fermented fish
    • Healthy fats and oils (e.g., coconut oil, cold pressed olive oil, avocado oil)
    • Probiotic supplements

    By following these guidelines and eating a variety of nutrient-dense foods, you can help restore balance in your digestive system and support the healing process.

    Third Stage Of Gaps Diet

    After focusing on grains, pasteurized dairy, starchy vegetables and legumes for a few weeks, the next stage of GAPS diet is to slowly reintroduce roasted and grilled meats, olive oil, juices, nuts and seeds. You can eat meat and eat animal fats as part of the GAPS diet, but it is important to choose high-quality sources.

    Fourth Stage Of Gaps Diet

    The last stage of the GAPS diet is to re-introduce all cooked grains and other cooked foods. This includes whole wheat, rice, oats and quinoa. The final step is to reintroduce pasteurized dairy products like milk, yogurt and cheese. You can also have raw organic egg yolks, organic eggs, fermented foods like homemade yogurt are great for Gaps.

    Try this easy Instant Pot Homemade Yogurt Recipe here!

    Get A Balance Diet

    Finally, it is important to remember that eating a balanced diet and getting plenty of physical activity is essential for overall health.

    The GAPS diet can help to support the healing process and provide your body with the nutrients it needs to function optimally, but it should not be viewed as a replacement for a healthy lifestyle.

    With dedication and consistency, you will eventually reach your desired level of health and wellbeing by following the GAPS diet. No more severe digestive symptoms

    Good luck!

    About the Author:

    Melanie delights in helping you apply healing protocols to everyday life, while eating really great food…and becoming friends with your body again. She writes at HonestBody.com As a mom of four children herself, she works with moms and their kiddos to help them feel their best and to have all the life and energy they were meant to have. She teaches the popular online GAPS Class. Melanie is an NTP, Certified GAPS Practitioner, and Healing Foods Specialist in Vermont. For fun you can either find her playing in her kitchen, Nordic skiing, or swimming in the Green Mountain rivers with her family.

    What Does Star Fruit Taste Like?

    May 22, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Fresh star fruits on a wooden board.

    Have you ever seen a star fruit and wondered what it tastes like? You may have spotted one at the grocery store or heard about it from friends, but either way, you haven't entirely found the courage to take that first bite. This article will answer the question, what does star fruit taste like? It's a cross between strawberry, lemon, pineapple and even sour green apple makes up its delicious taste.

    For anyone who loves unusual fruits as much as they love their favorite cuisine, star fruit may be your new go-to snack or dinner side dish!

    What Does Star Fruit Taste Like?
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Is Star Fruit?

    This tropical fruit has gained popularity for its unique appearance and delightful taste. The entire fruit takes the shape of a star when sliced crosswise, calling it "star-shaped fruit."

    Star fruit is a citrus fruit that grows on trees in the genus Citrus. Its surface is characterized by waxy skin that may have some brown spots, which are entirely normal.

    The fruit also showcases prominent brown ridges along its five points, adding to its distinctive look. You may find a few tiny black seeds inside the star fruit, especially the fully ripened ones.

    When the fruit is ready to be consumed, it will turn yellow, signaling its perfect ripeness. Both the skin and the flesh of this exotic fruit are edible. Star fruit's texture is similar to kiwi fruit or other juicy fruit.

    Origin of Star Fruit

    Star fruit, also known as carambola, is a unique and exotic fruit that originated in Southeast Asia. This distinctive fruit is commonly found in tropical areas, where it thrives in the warm climate and fertile soil.

    Over time, the popularity of star fruit has spread to other countries worldwide, including South America, Central America, and the Caribbean.

    Star fruits have two primary harvesting seasons in South Florida: August to September and December through February. Depending on the planting schedule of local growers, it's possible to find this fruit throughout the year.

    What Does a Star Fruit Taste Like?

    Ripe Star Fruit

    • Ripe star-fruits taste sweet and slightly tart flavor, often compared to a combination of citrus fruits such as pineapple, orange and lemon.
    • The sweetness of the ripe star fruit comes from its high sugar content, making it a delicious and refreshing treat to eat raw or add to various dishes and beverages.
    • When fully ripe, the star fruit's texture becomes juicy and tender, enhancing its overall taste.
    What Does Star Fruit Taste Like?

    Unripe Star Fruit

    • An unripe star fruit has a sour flavor, which is more pronounced than a ripe one. This is due to the higher acidity levels in the fruit, reminiscent of other citrus fruits like lime or green apple.
    • The sour taste of unripe star fruit can be pretty intense and may not be enjoyable for everyone. However, some people appreciate and use the tangy flavour in recipes that call for a sour element, such as salads or pickles.
    • Unlike ripe star fruits, unripe ones have a firmer texture, making them more challenging to eat raw.
    What Does Star Fruit Taste Like?

    Does Star Fruit Taste Like Banana?

    Star fruit has a unique and exotic flavor that is quite different from the taste of a banana. As you bite into the succulent and juicy star fruit, you'll notice a subtle sweetness reminiscent of a mix between grapes, apples, and citrus fruits.

    Its refreshing taste is accompanied by a slightly tart undertone, which perfectly balances the overall flavor profile of this tropical delight.

    While bananas have a more distinct and creamy taste, star fruit offers a crisp, tangy experience that leaves your taste buds craving more.

    What Does Star Fruit Taste Like?

    Is Star Fruit Sweet or Sour?

    Star fruit has a distinctive shape and flavor profile. The taste of star fruit can vary depending on its ripeness, with the ripe fruit offering a delightfully sweet taste, while the unripe or slightly underripe fruit leans more towards a tangy, sour flavor.

    On the other hand, the sourness of unripe star fruit can be pretty sharp and may not be suitable for everyone's palate..

    Can You Eat Overripe Star Fruit?

    Overripe star fruit is still safe to consume, but some factors must be considered. When a star fruit becomes overripe, it loses its crisp texture and vibrant flavor, often becoming mushy and bland.

    In some cases, overripe star fruit may develop an off taste or smell, indicating it's starting to spoil. If you notice any signs of mould or an unpleasant odour, it's best to discard the fruit.

    However, if the overripe star fruit appears in good condition, you can still enjoy it in smoothies, jams, or cooked dishes where the texture and taste are less noticeable.

    Can Star Fruit Eaten Raw?

    Yes, you can eat star fruit raw! Typically, it is consumed raw and without any additional flavoring. Many people enjoy consuming it fresh by cutting it into its signature star-shaped slices. The whole fruit, including its waxy exterior, can be, making it simple to enjoy in its raw form.

    Eating raw star fruit allows you to fully appreciate its natural flavors.

    How Fast Does Star-Fruit Ripen?

    This fruit typically takes around 3-4 weeks to ripen after flowering. Various factors, including temperature, humidity, and exposure to sunlight, can influence the ripening process.

    When the fruit ripens, its color changes from green to a vibrant yellow, developing a distinct, sweet aroma.

    What Does Star Fruit Taste Like?

    What Goes Well With Star Fruit?

    Star fruit goes well with different recipes.

    1. Savory dishes: Star fruit can be incorporated into savory dishes like salads, stir-fries, and even grilled alongside proteins like chicken or shrimp for a unique and delicious combination.
    2. Other Tropical fruits: Star fruit pairs wonderfully with various fruits in a fruit salad. Combining it with other tropical fruits such as mango, pineapple, and papaya makes it an excellent addition to fruit salads or smoothies.
    3. Citrus fruits: Combining star fruit with citrus fruits like oranges, grapefruits, and lemons adds a tangy twist and enhances the overall flavor profile of the dish.
    4. Berries: Pairing star fruit with berries like strawberries, raspberries, and blueberries creates a colorful and visually appealing dish and offers a delightful blend of sweet and tart flavors.
    5. Herbs and spices: Enhance the taste of star fruit by adding herbs and spices like mint, basil, or ginger to create a more complex and exciting flavor experience.
    6. Desserts: Star fruit's natural sweetness makes it an ideal garnish for desserts like ice cream, cakes, and tarts, adding a touch of exotic flair.
    7. Beverages: Blend star fruit with water, fruit juice, or coconut water to create a refreshing and nutritious drink that pairs well with various meals.
    8. Condiments and preserves: Incorporate star fruit into recipes for jams, chutneys, or salsa's to add a tropical twist to your favorite dishes and elevate their flavors.
    9. Star Fruit Juice: Cut the star fruits into thin pieces and place them in a blender. Blend Combine and mix until a smooth texture is achieved, incorporating a bit of water or orange juice to assist with the consistency. Pass the blended concoction through a fine mesh sieve to eliminate leftover pulp. Pour the star fruit juice into a glass with ice, garnish with a star fruit slice or mint sprig, and enjoy your refreshing tropical drink.

    How to Store Star Fruit?

    You can store star fruit by following a few simple steps is essential to ensure they remain fresh and delicious.

    Carefully rinse the mature star fruits under flowing water and lightly dab them with a hygienic towel to dry. Next, place the star fruits in an open container or plastic bag with small holes for ventilation, preventing excess moisture buildup.

    Store the ripe star fruits in the refrigerator's crisper drawer, where they last for about a week. Alternatively, if your star fruit is unripe, allow it to mature at room temperature, rotating it occasionally to ensure uniform ripening.

    Once fully ripe, follow the same storage steps mentioned earlier to preserve freshness and flavor.

    Where to Buy Star Fruit?

    If you're looking to buy star fruit, you're in luck, as they can be found at your local grocery store. Most stores carry this exotic and delicious fruit, making it easily accessible for anyone interested in trying something new.

    To find star fruit, head to the produce section of your favorite grocery store and watch for its unique shape and vibrant color.

    How to Choose a Star Fruit?

    Whenever buying star fruit, it's essential to pay attention to the color and texture of the fruit. Look for a star fruit with a vibrant light green to a bright yellow hue, indicating ripeness.

    Avoid fruits with dark green or brown edges, as these are signs of under-ripeness or over-ripeness. Press the fruit to check its firmness; a ripe star fruit should yield slightly to gentle pressure.

    What Does Star Fruit Taste Like?

    Star fruit is a delicious and versatile tropical fruit. Star fruit has a unique flavor that blends sweet, sour and tart notes. ts flavor is often compared to a mix of citrus fruits, such as oranges, limes and grapefruits, making it an interesting and flavorful addition to fruit salads, smoothies and Desserts.

    What Do Red Bananas Taste Like?

    May 21, 2023 by Angela Milnes

    Fresh red bananas.

    Ever heard of the red banana? This exotic variety of bananas has become increasingly popular recently due to its delicious taste and unique appearance. While regular yellow bananas have a sweet flavor. Have you ever wondered what do red bananas taste like?

    In this blog post, we'll explore the unique nuances that make up this fruit's tasty flavor profile and how to prepare it for eating. Take a bite of something new and read on to learn more about red bananas!

    What Do Red Bananas Taste Like?
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What Are Red Bananas?

    Red bananas are a unique and intriguing variety of bananas native to Southeast Asia but have gained popularity in many parts of the world. Their striking reddish-purple skin sets them apart from the more common yellow bananas.

    Are Red Bananas Real?

    Yes, red bananas are real, a variant of the yellow banana. They are native to Southeast Asia and are also found in parts of Africa, including East Africa, where they are known as African red bananas.

    Where Do Red Bananas Come From?

    Originating from Southeast Asia, Red bananas, or Red Dacca bananas, are a distinctive and vibrant variety of bananas.

    They are predominantly grown in regions such as India, the Philippines, Australia, and some parts of Central and South America.

    Bananas grow best in tropical climates and require abundant sunlight and well-draining soil for successful cultivation.

    What Do Red Bananas Taste Like?

    Red bananas are a delightful and unique alternative to the standard yellow banana. With their eye-catching crimson peel, red bananas look different and have a distinct flavor profile.

    Regarding what do red bananas taste like, these tropical treats are sweet and creamy with a slight hint of raspberry. It's important to note that red bananas are edible bananas, just like their yellow counterparts.

    Their soft texture and rich taste make them perfect for smoothies, fruit salad, or simply enjoyed as a healthy snack.

    What Do Red Bananas Taste Like When Underripe?

    Red bananas, with their unique and eye-catching color, offer a delightful twist to the traditional banana flavor we all know and love. When underripe, the taste of a red banana can be quite different from its fully ripened self.

    The red banana tastes slightly tart at this stage, with a hint of apple and berry undertones. The texture is also firmer than a ripe yellow banana, making it an interesting snacking option for those who enjoy a little tanginess.

    What Do Red Bananas Taste Like When Ripe?

    Ripe red bananas are a delightful and unique fruit to experience for those who haven't had the chance to try them yet. When fully ripe, these intriguing ripe bananas boast a sweet taste that is both satisfying and refreshing.

    In addition to their sweetness, they possess an earthy flavor that sets them apart from their yellow counterparts. Moreover, you may even notice a slightly floral essence lingering on your taste buds after each bite, adding a subtle touch of elegance to your snack time.

    Do Red Bananas Taste Like Raspberry?

    Red bananas have been intriguing fruit connoisseurs for years with their unique appearance and taste. These vibrant red fruits offer a delightful surprise to those who try them for the first time, as they possess a distinct raspberry-like flavor.

    This raspberry sweetness adds a delightful twist to the traditional banana taste, making them a popular choice among fruit lovers.

    The red banana taste is an exquisite blend of its raspberry-like flavor with the familiar creaminess of a regular banana, creating a delectable treat perfect for those seeking a new fruity adventure.

    Difference Between Red Bananas and Yellow Bananas

    What Do Red Bananas Taste Like?

    Red bananas and yellow bananas are two varieties of popular fruit that many people enjoy. While they may look similar, however, some key differences make each type unique. Here are some of the main distinctions between red bananas and their yellow counterparts:

    Color and Appearance

    As the names suggest, red bananas have reddish-purple skin, while yellow bananas have bright yellow skin when ripe. The red banana tree also has a distinct appearance, with red or maroon leaves compared to the green leaves of the yellow banana tree.

    Taste and Texture

    Red bananas have a sweeter taste and a hint of raspberry flavor compared to the typical yellow banana. They also have a creamier texture, making them ideal for smoothies and desserts. On the other hand, yellow bananas have a milder, more neutral taste and a slightly firmer texture.

    Ripening Process

    Both red and yellow bananas start as underripe green ones. However, the fruit ripens differently for each variety. Red bananas take longer to ripen and turn from green to a deep red or purple as they mature. Yellow bananas go from green to yellow and may develop brown spots when fully ripe.

    Nutritional Content

    While both types of bananas offer similar nutritional benefits, red bananas contain slightly more vitamin C, vitamin A, and antioxidants than yellow ones. This makes them a more nutritious choice.

    Availability and Usage

    Yellow bananas are more commonly found in grocery stores and markets worldwide, while red bananas are considered a more exotic and less common fruit. Despite this, both varieties can be used interchangeably in recipes, with red bananas adding a unique twist to dishes due to their sweeter taste and solid consistency.

    Can You Eat Raw Red Banana?

    While most people eat red bananas when they are ripe, some wonder if they can be eaten raw. The answer is super simple, yes, you can eat raw red bananas.

    However, some may wonder what does raw red banana taste like. The raw red banana tastes different from than ripe one. Raw red bananas taste like starchy potatoes and are less sweet than their ripe counterparts. Some people enjoy the taste of raw red bananas, while others find them too bland.

    Nutritional Facts

    NutrientAmount Per 100g
    Calories89 kcal
    Total Fat0.3 g
    Saturated Fat0.1 g
    Cholesterol0 mg
    Total Carbohydrate22.8 g
    Dietary Fiber2.6 g
    Sugars12.2 g
    Protein1.1 g
    Vitamin A64 IU
    Vitamin C8.7 mg
    Calcium5 mg
    Iron0.26 mg
    Potassium358 mg

    Please note that these values are approximate and may vary depending on the size and ripeness of the red banana. It's always a good idea to check the specific nutritional information for the red bananas you consume.

    What Dishes to Make With Red Bananas?

    Red bananas are a flavor and unique fruit that you can use in sweet and savory dishes. They have a creamier texture and a slightly sweeter taste than yellow bananas. If you're wondering what dishes to make with red bananas, here are a few ideas to get you started:

    1. Red Banana Bread: A delightful twist on the classic banana bread, red banana bread is moist, flavorful, and has a slight raspberry taste. Red bananas add a natural sweetness and richer flavor compared to regular bananas.
    2. Red Banana Smoothie: Blend red bananas with your favorite fruits, yogurt, and a splash of milk for a refreshing smoothie. The red bananas provide a creamy texture and a sweet, berry-like taste that complements other fruits well.
    3. Red Banana Pancakes: Use mashed red bananas in your pancake batter for a deliciously fruity breakfast. The red bananas add a subtle raspberry flavor and a hint of sweetness to the pancakes.
    4. Red Banana Ice Cream: Create a unique dessert using red bananas as the base for homemade ice cream. The red bananas give the ice cream a smooth, creamy texture and a sweet taste with a hint of raspberry.
    5. Red Banana Foster: Put a spin on the traditional Bananas Foster by using red bananas instead. The red bananas caramelize beautifully in the sauce, providing a slightly different taste profile with their berry undertones.
    6. Red Banana Salad: Mix sliced red bananas with your favorite greens, nuts, and a tangy dressing for a light, refreshing salad. The red bananas add a touch of sweetness and a burst of raspberry flavor to the dish.
    7. Red Banana Chutney: Combine red bananas with spices, vinegar, and sugar to create a unique chutney that pairs well with meats, cheeses, and crackers. The red bananas provide a sweet, fruity taste that balances the spicy and tangy flavors in the chutney.
    8. Red Banana Muffins: Bake red banana muffins for a fruity and wholesome snack or breakfast option. The red bananas add moisture, natural sweetness, and a raspberry-like taste to the muffins.
    9. Red Banana Pudding: Create a creamy, delicious pudding using red bananas as the base. The red bananas provide a smooth texture and a sweet taste with a hint of raspberry that sets it apart from the traditional banana pudding.
    10. Red Banana Oatmeal: Cook red bananas into your morning oatmeal for a nutritious and flavorful breakfast. Red bananas add a natural sweetness and a slightly different taste profile than regular bananas.

    Where Can I Buy Red Bananas?

    If you're looking to buy red bananas, you may have to search for them. Red bananas have distinctive red skin and are slightly sweeter than yellow ones.

    While they're not as widely available as regular bananas, they can often be found at specialty grocery stores or well-stocked local markets. You can also find and buy them at your local grocery store if they carry a wider variety of fruits.

    So What Do Red Bananas Taste Like?

    In conclusion, red bananas are a unique and flavorful fruit that can be used in a variety of dishes. They have a creamier texture and a slightly sweeter taste than yellow bananas, making them an excellent choice for smoothies, breads, pancakes, and other sweet treats.

    Red bananas can be found at specialty grocery stores and well-stocked local markets. Whether baking a batch of red banana bread or whipping up a red banana smoothie, you will surely enjoy this special fruit's subtle raspberry flavor and natural sweetness.

    Let's give it a try and see what you think. Who knows – red bananas may just become your new favorite fruit!

    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • …
    • 16
    • 17
    • 18
    • 19
    • Next Page »
    Angela Milnes.

    Hi I'm Angela

    Welcome to Eat Your Beets where you'll find Healthy and Nutritious Family Recipes that are tasty and simple to cook.

    More About Me

    Spring Recipes

    • edamame stir fry in a white bowl.
      Easy Edamame Stir Fry (15-Minute Protein-Packed Side Dish)
    • Best Gravlax Salmon With Dill (Cured Salmon).
      Best Gravlax Salmon With Dill (Cured Salmon)
    • One Pan Chicken And Asparagus.
      One Pan Chicken And Asparagus
    • Chicken And Cabbage Stir Fry Recipe.
      Chicken And Cabbage Stir Fry Recipe
    • Zucchini Egg Bake Recipe.
      Best Zucchini Egg Bake Recipe
    • How To Make Sun Dried Tomatoes Without Oil.
      How To Make Sun Dried Tomatoes Without Oil – Easy Oven Method

    Popular Recipes 💗

    • best stuffed mushrooms.
      The Best Stuffed Mushrooms
    • Slow Cooker Chicken Bacon Ranch Pasta.
      Slow Cooker Chicken Bacon Ranch Pasta
    • Baked Ricotta On A Spoon.
      Bariatric Friendly Ricotta Bake Recipe
    • Fun Veggie Train With Bell Peppers.
      Fun Veggie Train With Bell Peppers
    • Best Blueberry Smoothie Bowl topped with fruit.
      Best Blueberry Smoothie Bowl Recipe
    • Grilled Eggplant With Lemon Dip.
      Grilled Eggplant With Lemon Dip
    • Air Fryer Asparagus with Parmesan.
      Air Fryer Asparagus with Parmesan
    • Sheet Pan Chicken Fajitas.
      Sheet Pan Chicken Fajitas

    Footer

    As Seen In

    As Seen In.
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest

    Privacy Policy

    Accessibility Policy

    ↑ Back To Top

    Copyright © 2025 | Eat Your Beets | All Rights Reserved

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required